Vector

Radio Beacon
Transmitter
Technical Instruction Manual
VR500
VR1000
VR2000

Issue 2.0 ........................... 05 June 2009

Nautel Limited
10089 Peggy's Cove Road,
Hackett's Cove, NS, Canada B3Z 3J4
T.877 6 nautel (628835) or +1.902.823.2233
F.+1.902.823.3183 [email protected]

U.S. customers please contact:

Nautel Inc.
201 Target Industrial Circle, Bangor ME 04401
T.877 6 nautel (628835) or +1.207.947.8200
F.+1.207.947.3693 [email protected]

e-mail: [email protected]
www.nautel.com

” Copyright 2009 NAUTEL. All rights reserved.

Warranty
by Nautel Limited/Nautel Inc. (herein after referred to as Nautel)

Nautel Limited/Nautel Incorporated, hereinafter referred to as Nautel, guarantees all mechanical and electrical parts of
the equipment for a period of thirteen months from date of shipment.

1. A "Part Failure" shall be deemed to have occurred when the part has become defective, or does not have the
characteristics required for the specified equipment performance:

(a) When the equipment is operated within the design parameters, and

(b) When the equipment is installed and adjusted according to Nautel's prescribed procedures as stated in
the instruction manual.

2. Nautel shall provide replacements for all "Parts" at no cost to the Customer when they become defective during
the warranty period, and upon the return of the defective part.

3. In the event that a "Part" fails during the warranty period and causes damage to a sub-assembly that cannot be
readily repaired in the field, the entire sub-assembly so damaged may be returned to Nautel for repair. The
repairs will be made without charge to the Customer.

4. Where warranty replacements or repair are provided under items 2 or 3, Nautel will pay that part of the shipping
costs incurred in returning the part/assembly to the Customer.

5. Warranty replacement parts and repair, which are provided under items 2 or 3, shall be guaranteed for a period
of ninety days from date of shipment or until the end of the original warranty period, whichever occurs later.

6. Nautel will not assume responsibility for any charges incurred by other than Nautel employees.

7. Nautel shall have the privilege of investigating whether failures have been caused by factors beyond its control.

8. Nautel shall in no event be liable for any consequential damages arising from the use of this equipment.

9. When requesting a warranty repair/replacement, please provide complete and accurate information. Observe
the instructions regarding 'Equipment Being Returned to Nautel' on page two of this warranty and provide the
information requested.

10. When ordering spare/replacement parts, please provide complete and accurate information. Refer to the parts
list of the Repair manual for ordering information. Provide as much of the information requested for 'Equipment
Being Returned to Nautel' on page two of this warranty as is practical. The information identified by an asterisk
is the minimum required.

Nautel Limited Nautel Inc.

10089 Peggy's Cove Road 201 Target Industrial Circle
Hackett's Cove NS Canada B3Z 3J4 Bangor ME USA 04401
T. 877 6 nautel (628835) or 1.902.823.2233 T. 877 6 nautel (628835) or 1.207.947.8200
F. 1.902.823.3183 F. 1.207.947.3693
24hr. Answering Service 1.902.823.3900

Customer Service Notice

A ‘Technical Assistance’ and ‘Plug-in Module Exchange’ service is available to Nautel users.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Factory Support
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
Nautel's field service department provides telephone technical assistance on a 24 hour, seven days a week basis.
Requests by other media (facsimile or e-mail) will be responded to the next working day if received after Nautel's normal
working hours. Contact the appropriate field service centre from the following:

U.S.A. customers use: Nautel Incorporated T. +1.207.947.8200 (24 hours) or 877 6 nautel (628835)
201 Target Industrial Circle F. +1.207.947.3693
Bangor, Maine 04401

All other customers use: Nautel Limited T. +1.902.823.3900 (24 hours) or 877 6 nautel (628835)
10089 Peggy’s Cove Road, F. +1.902.823.3183
Hackett’s Cove, NS, Canada E-Mail [email protected]
B3Z 3J4 Web www.nautel.com

MODULE EXCHANGE SERVICE

In order to provide Nautel customers with a fast and efficient service in the event of a problem, Nautel operates a
factory rebuilt, module exchange service which takes full advantage of the high degree of module redundancy in
Nautel equipment. This module exchange service is operated from Nautel’s factory in Bangor, Maine and Hackett’s
Cove, Nova Scotia. These two locations allow us to provide a quick turn around service to keep our customers on
the air. During the transmitter’s warranty period, up to thirteen months from shipment, repair and exchange of
modules is at no charge to the customer. When the warranty has expired, a charge of 80% of the list price for all
exchanged modules is made. If the faulty module is returned to Nautel within 30 days, a credit is issued reducing
this charge by one half to 40% of the list price. U.S.A. customers are required to contact our Bangor, Maine facility.
Canadian and overseas customers should contact our Nova Scotia, Canada facility.

EQUIPMENT BEING RETURNED TO NAUTEL

For all equipment being returned to Nautel and all requests for repairs or replacements:

Obtain an RMA number from Nautel (you must have an RMA number to return equipment)
Mark the item as 'field return'
Mark the item with the RMA number assigned by Nautel
Address the item to the appropriate Nautel facility

Complete and accurate information regarding the equipment being returned will ensure prompt attention and will
expedite the dispatch of replacements. Refer to the nameplate on the transmitter and/or the appropriate
module/assembly to obtain name, type, part and serial number information. Refer to the parts list of this manual or the
appropriate service instruction manual for additional ordering information.

The following information should accompany each request:

* Model of Equipment
* Serial number of Equipment
* Name of Part/Assembly
Serial number of Part/Assembly
* Complete reference designation of Part/Assembly
* Nautel's part number of Part/Assembly
* OEM's part number of Part/Assembly
Number of hours in Use
Nature of defect
* Return shipping address

* Denotes minimum information required to order spare/replacement parts

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Safety
Symbols
General definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals.

DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE

Indicates dangerous voltages (in excess of 72 V), capable of causing a fatal

electrical shock, are present on or near parts bearing this label.

GROUND (EARTH)

Used with wiring terminals to indicate the terminal must be connected to

earth ground before operating equipment. If power is supplied without
grounding the equipment, there is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal
electrical shock. Also used on electrical schematics to indicate a part that is
connected to earth ground.

GROUND (PROTECTIVE or SAFETY)

Used with protective (safety) conductor terminals to indicate the terminal

must be connected to ground before operating the equipment. If power is
supplied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of receiving a
severe or fatal electrical shock.

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE

Indicates a part or assembly is or contains devices that are electrostatic

sensitive. To prevent damage to these devices, ensure the handling
procedures outlined in this manual are observed.

WARNING A WARNING denotes a hazard. It identifies an operating procedure,

condition, etc. which, if not strictly observed or adhered to, could result in
injury or death to personnel. Throughout the technical manual, a
WARNING shall immediately precede the text to which it applies.

CAUTION A CAUTION denotes a hazard. It identifies an operating procedure,

condition, etc., which, if not strictly observed or adhered to, could result in
damage to, or destruction of the equipment. Throughout the technical
manual, a CAUTION shall immediately precede the text to which it
applies.

NOTE A NOTE denotes important information pertaining to an operating

procedure, condition, statement, etc., which is essential to highlight. A
NOTE may precede or follow the text to which it applies.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Safety
Toxic Hazard Warning

There are devices used in this equipment containing beryllium oxide ceramic,
which is non-hazardous during normal device operation and under normal device
failure conditions. These devices are specifically identified in the equipment parts
list(s) by including ‘BeO’ in the part’s description.

DO NOT cut, crush or grind devices because the resulting dust may be
HAZARDOUS IF INHALED. Unserviceable devices should be disposed of as
harmful waste.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Contents Page
1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 INTRODUCTION 1-1

1.2 FACTORY SUPPORT 1-1
1.3 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF MANUAL 1-1
1.4 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT 1-1
1.5 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION 1-2
1.6 TEST EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL TOOLS 1-2
1.7 GLOSSARY OF TERMS 1-2

2 PREPARATION FOR USE AND INSTALLATION

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2-1

2.2 PREPARATION FOR USE 2-1
2.2.1 Transmitter Room Requirements 2-1
2.2.1.1 Transmitter Dimensions 2-1
2.2.1.2 Transmitter Weights 2-1
2.2.1.3 Transmitter Clearances 2-1
2.2.1.4 Air Flushing 2-1
2.2.1.5 Cooling and Heating 2-2
2.2.1.6 Work Area 2-2
2.2.1.7 Power Source Switch 2-2
2.2.2 Lightning Protection 2-2
2.2.3 Station Reference Ground 2-2
2.2.4 Ac Power Source 2-2
2.2.4.1 Ac Wiring 2-2
2.2.5 Antenna Feed Cable 2-5
2.2.6 Antenna Tower 2-5
2.2.7 External Control/Monitor Wiring 2-5
2.2.8 Electrical Power 2-5
2.2.8.1 Ac Voltage Source 2-5
2.2.8.2 External Ac Switching 2-5
2.2.8.3 Dc Voltage Source 2-5
2.2.9 Antenna System 2-6
2.2.9.1 RF Feed Cable 2-6
2.2.9.2 Interface Protection Option 2-6
2.2.10 Internal gc Source 2-6
2.2.11 External Interlocks 2-7
2.2.12 Remote Control Circuits 2-7
2.2.12.1 On/Off Control 2-8
2.2.12.2 Charger Alarm 2-8
2.2.12.3 Standby Code 1 2-8
2.2.12.4 Standby Code 2 2-8
2.2.13 Press-To-Talk Input 2-8
2.2.14 User Assigned Information 2-8
2.2.14.1 Carrier Frequency 2-8
2.2.14.2 Keyed Tone Frequency 2-8

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Contents Page
2.2.14.3 Identification Code 2-8
2.2.14.4 Standby Codes 2-8
2.2.15 Serial Port Features 2-8
2.2.15.1 Remote Control and Monitoring Interface 2-9
2.2.15.2 ATU Interface 2-9
2.2.16 RF Monitoring Sample 2-9
2.2.17 Parts Supplied By Nautel 2-9
2.2.18 Parts Not Supplied By Nautel 2-9
2.2.19 Test Equipment and Special Tools 2-9
2.2.20 Available Options 2-9
2.3 INSTALLATION 2-10
2.3.1 Acceptance of Shipment 2-11
2.3.2 Unpacking Instructions 2-11
2.3.3 Visual Inspection 2-11
2.3.4 Determining Control/Monitor Requirements 2-13
2.3.5 Installation of External Control/Monitor Wiring 2-13
2.3.6 Installation of Ac Power Source Wiring 2-14
2.3.7 Installation of Dc Power Source Wiring (Optional) 2-15
2.4 COMMISSIONING 2-15
2.4.1 Precautions 2-15
2.4.2 Turn-On Prerequisites 2-15
2.4.3 Initial Turn-On 2-15

3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3.1 INTRODUCTION 3-1

3.1.1 Precautions 3-1
3.2 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN 3-1
3.2.1 Turn Off RF Output 3-1
3.2.2 Complete Shutdown 3-1
3.3 EXTERNAL SAFETY INTERLOCK 3-1
3.4 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE PROTECTION 3-2
3.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 3-2
3.5.1 Front Panel 3-3
3.5.2 Exciter Interface PWB 3-4
3.5.3 Remote Interface PWB 3-4
3.5.4 RF Synthesizer PWB 3-4
3.5.5 Miscellaneous, Exciter Control/Assembly 3-4
3.5.6 Miscellaneous, RF Power Block 3-4
3.5.7 Ac Power Distribution Assembly 3-4
3.5.8 Dc Power Distribution Assembly 3-4
3.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY 3-20
3.6.1 Pushbutton Switches 3-20

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Contents Page
3.6.2 Main Screens 3-20
3.6.3 Viewing Faults 3-22
3.6.4 Exciter Control 3-22
3.6.5 Viewing Events Log 3-23
3.6.6 Setting Real Time Clock 3-24
3.6.7 Setting RF Monitor Limits 3-24
3.6.8 Meter Settings 3-25
3.6.8.1 Changing Meter Groups 3-26
3.6.8.2 Selecting Analog Meter 3-26
3.6.8.3 Calibrating Analog Meter 3-27
3.6.9 Selecting Power Source 3-27
3.6.10 Configuring the Sonalert 3-28
3.6.11 Setting a Timed Shutdown 3-28
3.6.12 Changing Factory Calibrated Settings 3-29
3.6.12.1 Calibrating Diagnostic Display Meters 3-30
3.6.12.2 Setting Protection Threshold Levels 3-30
3.6.12.3 Setting Maximum Output Limitations 3-31
3.6.12.4 Using Factory Settings 3-31
3.6.13 Viewing and Setting Peripherals 3-31
3.6.13.1 Setting the Keyer 3-32
3.6.13.2 Viewing Power Module Status 3-33
3.6.13.3 ATU Controls 3-34
3.6.13.4 Testing the Standby Side 3-35
3.6.13.5 Selecting Peripherals 3-35
3.6.13.6 Checking Modules 3-35
3.6.14 Remote Control Monitor System Settings 3-36
3.6.14.1 Setting Control Points 3-36
3.6.14.2 Setting Monitor Points 3-36
3.6.14.3 Serial Settings 3-37
3.6.14.4 Automatic Reporting 3-37
3.6.15 Viewing Power Related Parameters and
Setting ATU Current Feedback 3-38

4 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1 INTRODUCTION 4-1

4.2 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 4-1
4.3 FUNCTIONAL TESTS 4-1
4.3.1 General 4-1
4.3.2 Test Equipment Required 4-3
4.3.3 Test Prerequisites 4-3
4.3.4 Initial Turn On 4-3
4.3.5 Standard Adjustments 4-4
4.3.6 Non-Standard Adjustments 4-8

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Contents Page
5 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 GENERAL 5-1

5.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 5-1
5.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-2
5.4 ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTION 5-2
5.5 TROUBLESHOOTING FRONT PANEL ALARMS 5-3
5.6 REPLACING AN RF POWER MODULE 5-9
5.7 FET CHECKING/REPLACEMENT 5-9
5.8 EXCITER/CONTROL PWB REPLACEMENT 5-11
5.8.1 Exciter Interface PWB and Interconnecting PWB
Replacement 5-11
5.8.2 Exciter Monitor/Generator PWB Replacement 5-12

6 THEORY OF OPERATION

6.1 INTRODUCTION 6-1

6.2 TRANSMITTER OVERVIEW 6-1
6.3 AC DISTRIBUTION 6-1
6.4 DC DISTRIBUTION (Optional) 6-2
6.4.1 Battery Boost PWB 6-2
6.4.1.1 Dc Input 6-2
6.4.1.2 Switching Signal 6-2
6.4.1.3 B+ Voltage 6-2
6.4.1.4 Inhibit PWM 6-2
6.5 EXCITER CONTROL/MONITOR 6-2
6.5.1 Exciter Interface PWB 6-5
6.5.2 RF Synthesizer PWBs 6-5
6.5.3 Interphase PDM Driver PWBs 6-7
6.5.4 Ac/Dc Universal Input Power Supplies 6-13
6.5.5 LVPS Buck Converter PWBs 6-13
6.5.6 Exciter Monitor/Generator PWBs 6-14
6.5.7 Control/Display PWB 6-15
6.5.8 Remote Interface PWB 6-17
6.5.9 Front Panel Metering 6-18
6.5.10 NDB Site Interface PWB (Optional) 6-19
6.5.11 Modem (Optional) 6-19
6.5.12 Dc-Dc Power Supply PWB 6-19
6.6 RF POWER BLOCK 6-20
6.6.1 RF Power Modules 6-20
6.6.2 Power Block Distribution PWB 6-27
6.6.3 RF Filter PWB 6-27

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Contents Page
6 THEORY OF OPERATION

6.7 RF COMBINER/PROBE 6-27

6.7.1 RF Combiner Transformer 6-27
6.7.2 Forward/Reflected Power Probe 6-27
6.7.3 RF Current Probe 6-28
6.8 MODULATION DEPTH WHEN USING A HIGH ‘Q’
ANTENNA 6-28

7 PARTS INFORMATION

7.1 INTRODUCTION 7-1

7.2 FAMILY TREE 7-1
7.3 HOW TO LOCATE INFORMATION FOR A
SPECIFIC PART 7-1
7.4 REFERENCE DESIGNATION LISTS 7-1
7.5 COLUMN CONTENT EXPLANATION 7-1
7.6 OEM CODE TO MANUFACTURER CROSS-REFERENCE 7-2
7.7 COMMON ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS 7-3

8 WIRING INFORMATION

8.1 INTRODUCTION 8-1

8.2 WIRING LISTS NOT PROVIDED 8-1
8.3 PRINTED WIRING PATTERNS 8-1
8.4 WIRE COLOURS 8-1
8.5 WIRING LISTS PROVIDED 8-1
8.5.1 Connector Mating Information 8-1

9 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS

9.1 INTRODUCTION 9-1

9.2 COMPONENT VALUES 9-1
9.3 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS 9-1
9.4 LOGIC SYMBOLS 9-1
9.5 REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS 9-1
9.6 UNIQUE SYMBOLOGY 9-1
9.7 TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS 9-1
9.8 IDENTIFICATION OF SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 9-2
9.9 STRUCTURE OF SCHEMATICS 9-2
9.10 LOCATING THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM(S) FOR A
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK 9-2
9.11 LOCATING A PART/ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED
ON A SCHEMATIC 9-2

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Contents Page
10 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

10.1 INTRODUCTION 10-1

10.2 LOCATING ASSEMBLY DETAIL DRAWINGS 10-1
10.3 CONTENT OF MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 10-1

List of Tables
1-1 Recommended Site Test Equipment 1-3
1-2 Glossary of Terms 1-4
2-1 Forced Air Exchange Rate 2-1
2-2 Ac Power Consumption 2-5
2-3 Dc Power Consumption 2-6
2-4 ATU Serial Interface 2-13
2-5 RS-422 Remote Interface 2-13
2-6 RS-232 Remote Interface 2-13
2-7 Ac Power Connection 2-14
2-8 Dc Power Connection 2-15
2-9 RF Filter PWB Tap Settings vs Frequency 2-17
3-1 Front Panel – System Diagram Controls and Indicators 3-5
3-2 Front Panel – Control Section Controls and Indicators 3-7
3-3 Exciter Interface PWB Controls and Indicators 3-9
3-4 Remote Interface PWB Controls and Indicators 3-11
3-5 RF Synthesizer PWB Controls and Indicators 3-13
3-6 Miscellaneous Exciter/Control Assembly Controls and Indicators 3-14
3-7 Miscellaneous RF Power Block Controls and Indicators 3-15
3-8 Ac Power Distribution Assembly Controls and Indicators 3-17
3-9 Dc Power Distribution Assembly Controls and Indicators 3-19
3-10 Events Log Displays – Non Alarm Events 3-23
5-1 Troubleshooting and Replacement Tips 5-5
7-1 Manufacturer’s Index 7-4
8-1 Wiring Lists Provided 8-1
9-1 Electrical Schematics 9-3
10-1 Mechanical Drawings 10-2

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Contents Page

List of Figures/Drawings
2-1 Vector Transmitter Environment Considerations 2-3
2-2 Customer Interface to Vector Transmitter 2-4
2-3 Single Ended Input Selected 2-7
2-4 Differential Input Selected 2-8
2-5 Removing Packing Support Bars 2-12
2-6 Block Diagram – Recommended Low Power Transmitter
System Installation 2-18
2-7 Block Diagram – Recommended High Power Transmitter
System Installation 2-19
3-1 Vector Transmitter Front Panel (Primary User Interface) 3-3
3-2 Vector Transmitter Front Panel – System Diagram Section 3-4
3-3 Vector Transmitter Front Panel – Control Section 3-6
3-4 Part of NAPI76A/01 Exciter Interface PWB A2A2 3-8
3-5 Part of NAPI78D/01 Remote Interface PWB A2A3 3-10
3-6 NAPE70C RF Synthesizer PWB A2A5 and A2A9 3-12
3-7 NAX233/01A, /02A & /04A Ac Power Distribution Assembly A8 (Rear View) 3-16
3-8 NAX235/01A & /02 Dc Power Distribution Assembly A7 3-18
3-9 Diagnostic Display – Meters Screen 3-20
3-10 Diagnostic Display – Main Menu 3-20
3-11 Flow Diagram – Diagnostic Display Functions 3-21
4-1 Exciter/Control Assembly A2 4-2
4-2 CW signal set to fill display 4-15
4-3 CW signal with position adjusted to mid-point of display 4-15
4-4 MCW signal, 95% modulation 4-16
6-1 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter 6-3
6-2 Block Diagram – Exciter Control/Monitor Stage 6-9
6-3 Timing Diagram for PDM Differential Amplifier 6-11
6-4 Block Diagram – RF Power Block 6-23
6-5 Block Diagram – RF Power Module 6-25
6-6 Simplified Principles of Class ‘D’ Operation 6-29
7-1 Family Tree – Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter 7-5
7-2 Family Tree – RF Power Block 7-6

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Release Control Record

Issue Date Reason

2.0 05 June 2009 Release 2 of product (NARB17A)

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Jun.05.09

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Section 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 INTRODUCTION x Can be serially connected to Nautel’s
The Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter: ATU-HP or ATU-LP Antenna Tuning
Unit, allowing a variety of control/
x Automatically transmits specific monitoring features, including
beacon identification signals at pre- stabilization of the antenna current by
selected repetition rates. Special codes adjusting transmitter power level.
may also be transmitted when
commanded from an external source. 1.2 FACTORY SUPPORT
Provision is made for local or remote Nautel provides after sales factory
operation of the transmitter as well as support. Technical assistance is available
antenna fine-tuning through controls on on a 24 hour, seven days a week basis. A
the transmitter's front panel. Emission factory service facility for repair of
is continuous carrier (NON), beacon modules/assemblies is also available.
keyed identification tone (A2A) and Refer to the Factory Support portion of the
beacon with voice (A2A/A3A). Warranty pages at the front of this manual
for additional information.
x Provides continuous carrier power for
three different power configurations: 1.3 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF
MANUAL
VR500 500 W maximum This Technical Instruction manual
VR1000 1,000 W maximum provides the information required to
VR2000 2,000 W maximum install, operate and maintain the
equipment. Where applicable, changes
x Can be modulated from 0 to 95%. have been incorporated to reflect non-
standard customer requests.
x Operates in the LF/MF band (190 kHz
to 535 kHz). 1.4 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
When combined with an appropriate
x Has provision for a standby exciter antenna system, the Vector transmitter
section, which duplicates the PDM provides reliable facilities for an NDB
generation circuitry and low voltage reference station. It is ideally suited for
power supplies. remote or unmanned sites. Remote control
facilities are incorporated to allow
x Has provision for single side or dual unattended operation from a remote
side (A and B) RF power sections, location.
which can be manually or
automatically selected.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 1-1

Section 1 General Information Issue 2.0
1.5 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION 1.6 TEST EQUIPMENT AND
The Vector transmitter’s cabinet SPECIAL TOOLS
dimensions, including side panels, rear Table 1-1 lists the test equipment and
door, and RF output connector are as special tools that are required to operate
follows: and maintain the Vector transmitter.

Height Width Depth 1.7 GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Table 1-2 provides a list of unique terms,
73.5 in. 23 in. 25.2 in. abbreviations, and acronyms used in this
(186.7 cm) (48.3 cm) (64.1 cm) publication.

The RF output coaxial cable connects to an

N-type connector on the top of the
transmitter cabinet. External ac power and,
if applicable, dc power cabling may enter
the cabinet through cable entry holes in the
top or bottom of the cabinet. External input
(RF drive and control) and output (status
and alarm monitoring) cabling enter the
cabinet through cable entry holes in the top
the transmitter cabinet.

Page 1-2 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 1 General information
 Table 1-1: Recommended Site Test Equipment
EQUIPMENT PART/MODEL NUMBER APPLICATION
OR TYPE (EQUIVALENT
MAY BE USED)
Dummy load 50 :, rated for at least twice Provides precise load for ‘off-
the maximum continuous air’ testing (calibration and
carrier power level (1,000 W, troubleshooting).
2,000 W, and 4,000 W),
VSWR 1.1

Digital multimeter 3-1/2 digit, ac and dc volts Testing and maintenance

(10 M: input), ohms and
amps, ± 0.5% accuracy,
Beckman 3010

Ac Voltmeter HP400E Precise measurement of RF

voltage across dummy load
during calibration procedures

Frequency counter 5 ppm up to 10 MHz Measure carrier frequency

Fluke model 1900A

Oscilloscope Tektronix model T922 Testing and maintenance

RF Signal Generator Capable of operating in Simulate external RF drive

frequency range of 190 – 550 source during testing and
kHz with an adjustable output troubleshooting.
capable of supplying 0.5 V
pp – 4 V pp into 50 :

Dc power supply (variable) 0 – 50 V, 1A Testing and maintenance

Torque wrench Capable of providing five Installing power MOSFETs

inch-pounds (0.665 Newton-
Meters) of torque.

Serial null modem adapter 9-pin null modem Programming firmware

Current probe Calibrate reflected power

Clip-on dc current meter Calibrate battery current

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 1-3

Section 1 General Information Issue 2.0
Table 1-2: Glossary of Terms

TERM DESCRIPTION
ac Alternating current

AM Amplitude modulation

Bit Basic timing increment derived from master clock in keying unit.
Length is dependent on frame length and number of characters
used. An 8-bit frame is nominally 125 ms long.

Character Letter or number in the beacon identification signal

dBm Decibel reference 1 mW

dc Direct current

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance

Element Smallest divisible part of a character. May be either a dot or a

dash

Frame Selected, fixed interval of time that is sufficiently long to

accommodate the beacon identification signal and an interval of
continuous tone. Normally set to 80 bits (10 seconds)

GUI Graphic user interface. Referred to as diagnostic display

throughout the manual

Hz Hertz

IPM Incidental phase modulation

Modular Redundancy Identical modules operating in an overall system design such that
failure of one module does not affect the output of the system

PDM Pulse duration modulation

PWB Printed wiring board (also known as printed circuit board)

RF Radio frequency

SPI Serial Peripheral Interface

V ac Volts ac

VSWR Voltage standing wave ratio

Page 1-4 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 1 General information
Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Section 2 PREPARATION FOR USE AND INSTALLATION

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.2.1.1 Transmitter Dimensions
This section contains pre-installation and Refer to paragraph 1.5 or Figure MD-1 for
installation information for the transmitter. transmitter dimensions. Dimensions
Nautel recommends that all requirements identify room entry and floor space
be incorporated to ensure optimum requirements and will assist in determining
reliability and performance. cable lengths and routing.

NOTE 2.2.1.2 Transmitter Weights

Failure to comply with these Refer to Figure 2-1 for transmitter weights.
recommendations and instructions could Sufficient manpower or lifting apparatus is
void the manufacturer’s warranty. Please required to move the transmitter.
review Nautel’s warranty terms for more
information. 2.2.1.3 Transmitter Clearances
Refer to Figure 2-1 for recommended
2.2 PREPARATION FOR USE transmitter clearances.
Transmitter sites should be prepared to
receive the transmitter prior to its delivery 2.2.1.4 Air Flushing
and installation. The following must be Fans in each RF power module draw
taken into consideration when preparing cooling air through filters in the front of the
new sites and should be used as the transmitter and exhaust it through
evaluating criteria at existing sites. Nautel ventilation in the rear door. The air
recommends that all requirements be exchange rate required to achieve an
incorporated to ensure optimum reliability acceptable intake/exhaust temperature
and performance. rise (see Table 2-1) is dependent on the
power level of the transmitter and the
NOTE operating power source.
Frequent reference is made to connectors
and terminal blocks on the remote Table 2-1: Forced Air Exchange Rate
interface PWB. This PWB is located at the Air Exchange Rate
rear of the exciter/control assembly. Product (Normal Operation)
(ft3/min or CFM)
2.2.1 Transmitter Room
VR500 110
Requirements
The following criteria must be addressed VR1000 220
when finalizing the transmitter site. VR2000 440

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-1

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
2.2.1.5 Cooling and Heating 2.2.3 Station Reference Ground
Refer to Figure 2-1 for transmitter room The site must contain a station reference
ambient air temperature limitations. If ground, as defined in Nautel’s
necessary, ensure adequate cooling and/ Recommendations for Transmitter Site
or heating systems are in place to Preparation booklet. This ground must
maintain appropriate ambient air provide a continuous, low impedance path
temperature. to the earth. The transmitter cabinet's
designated reference ground point, the
2.2.1.6 Work Area shield of the coaxial feed cable, and the
Nautel recommends that a suitable work ground connection of the power source's
area with an adequate table surface be surge protection devices must be
provided adjacent to the transmitter to connected directly to the station reference
permit bench adjustment and repair of ground using, as a minimum, 100 mm (4
modules. Static precautions must be inch) copper strap.
observed.
2.2.4 Ac Power Source
2.2.1.7 Power Source Switch If an ac power source is used, all
A switching assembly for the ac or dc conductors should be protected by bi-
power source should be wall mounted in directional surge protection devices that
close proximity to the transmitter. are connected between each conductor
and the station reference ground. In
2.2.2 Lightning Protection addition, the conductors, as a group,
Extremely high voltage and current should pass through a ferrite toroid. The
transients are produced when a lightning inductance formed by this toroid is
strike occurs. These transients, which are transparent to ac voltages, but presents
usually the most significant hazard to any impedance to transients originating in the
solid state transmitter, may be passed to power source. A surge protector panel,
the transmitter through the wiring containing suitably rated varistors, is
connecting the transmitter to the power available from Nautel for this purpose. If
source and the antenna system. All used, the surge protector panel should be
practical precautions should be taken to installed in close proximity to the station
protect the transmitter from this reference ground.
phenomenon. Refer to the Lightning
Protection section of Nautel’s 2.2.4.1 Ac Wiring
Recommendations for Transmitter Site The ac wiring for the transmitter should
Preparation booklet for specific protection not be smaller than 14 AWG, based on an
techniques. Installing Nautel’s interface average ac input voltage of 200 V ac.
protection unit is highly recommended.
The following requirements are NOTE
considered to be essential and failure to Local electrical codes must be observed
follow the site layout requirements may when sizing cables. The ac power source
void the transmitter warranty. usually presents the lowest impedance
path to ground potential for a lightning
NOTE strike and will normally carry most of the
The following paragraphs discuss lightning induced current away from the
customer required connections to the transmitter. When lightning hits the power
transmitter. Figure 2-2 is provided as an source, a significant amount of induced
aid for various customer interface current may flow towards the transmitter.
connections and should be referenced In this instance, the objective is to route
while planning and installing these the current around the transmitter, instead
connections. of through it, to the best ground available.

Page 2-2 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation
 WEIGHT (crated)

VR500 – 166 kg (365 lbs)

VR1000 – 184 kg (405 lbs)

VR2000 – 202 kg (445 lbs)

Figure 2-1 Vector Transmitter Environment Considerations

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-3

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
 REMOTE SITE CONTROL PWB
CONTROL/ (OPTIONAL)
MONITOR
WIRING

AC DISTRIBUTION CONNECTORS
(FACTORY INSTALLED TO EXCITER
AND RF POWER BLOCKS)

AC INPUT
170-270 V ac
1-PHASE
(L-L or L-N)

DC INPUT
128-168 V dc
(maximum current
11.7A for VR500;
23.4 A for VR1000)

Dimensions = mm (inches)

Customer Interface to Vector Transmitter

Issue 2.0 Not to Scale Figure 2-2 Page 2-4
 2.2.5 Antenna Feed Cable 2.2.8.1 Ac Voltage Source
The shield of the antenna feed coaxial cable The transmitter will operate from a 170 to
should be connected directly to the station 270 V ac, 50 Hz, (line-to-neutral) or 60 Hz
reference ground where it enters the (line-to-line) ac power source. The voltage
building. In addition, the centre conductor must be maintained within the specified
and the shield of the feed cable should pass voltage range under all loading conditions.
through a ferrite toroid positioned between The transmitter contains circuitry that
the shield ground at the building entrance maintains the RF output at the pre-set
and the shield termination at the transmitter carrier level for voltage variations within this
reference ground. This toroid is transparent range. Power consumption and line current
to the RF signal, but presents impedance to depends on the transmitter’s maximum rated
transients originating in the antenna. When power level (see Table 2-2). Nautel
Nautel’s interface protection unit is installed, recommends the ac power source have a
the RF feed cable is connected directly to it. 20% over-capacity to ensure adequate
It contains the necessary ferrite for the ac regulation.
wiring and RF feeder cable.
Table 2-2: Ac Power Consumption
2.2.6 Antenna Tower
The antenna tower is the most likely target Vector Max. Power Max. Line
for lightning strikes. It is imperative that it Product Consumption Current
contain lightning protection devices as the VR500 1550 VA 9.1 A RMS
first line of defense against lightning strikes. VR1000 3100 VA 18.2 A RMS
VR2000 6200 VA 36.5 A RMS
2.2.7 External Control/Monitor
Wiring based on worst-case parameters (maximum
All external control/monitor wiring that may RF output power, minimum ac voltage and
be subject to lightning induced transients efficiency)
should be interfaced to the station reference
ground by surge protection devices at the 2.2.8.2 External Ac Switching
building entry. All conductors and shields It is required that all current carrying
should pass through a ferrite toroid that is conductors from the ac power source be
positioned between its surge protection controlled by an external switching box
device and the transmitter. This toroid is located in close proximity to the transmitter.
transparent to control/monitor signals, but This switch box should be clearly marked
presents impedance to lightning induced TRANSMITTER EMERGENCY ON/OFF
transients. SWITCH. Refer to Table 2-2 for current
ratings that should be observed when
2.2.8 Electrical Power selecting a circuit breaker and associated
The transmitter is configured during input wiring.
manufacture to operate from an ac or dc
power source. The power source and 2.2.8.3 Dc Voltage Source
associated switching components and wiring As an option, the transmitter may operate
must meet the following requirements: from a dc power source (battery bank). Pre-
installation considerations include:

NOTE
This paragraph includes changes that
accommodate the user supplied dc power
source.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-5

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
x The battery must provide between 128 2.2.9.2 Interface Protection Unit
and 168 V dc (limits are adjustable An interface protection unit (SPU1 or SPU2)
within this range) under all loads. The is available from Nautel. It prevents lightning
no-load voltage must be in excess of induced transients from flowing through the
132 V dc (limit is adjustable) for the transmitter. Isolation of the transmitter and
transmitter to turn on initially. the desired lightning protection is
accomplished by:
x Line current depends on the
transmitter’s maximum rated power level x Low power (SPU1) applications only:
(see Table 2-3). Inserting a 1:1 isolation transformer in the
RF feed cable to ensure there is no dc
Table 2-3: Dc Power Consumption connection between the transmitter's RF
output and the antenna system.
Vector Product Max. Line Current
x Low power (SPU1) applications only:
VR500 11.7 A Passing all wires through ferrite toroids. A
VR1000 23.4 A toroid is an inductance transparent to
normal signals but presents impedance to
based on worst-case parameters (maximum
lightning induced transients.
RF output power, minimum dc voltage and
efficiency)
x Connecting suitably rated varistors
between the ac line and the station
x The capacity of the dc battery bank and
reference ground.
the Low Battery Voltage Threshold
setting, dictates the length of time the
x Low power (SPU1) applications only:
transmitter will operate. When the battery
Connecting the shield of the coaxial
bank voltage falls below the low battery
cable from the antenna/phaser directly to
voltage threshold (factory set for 132 V
the reference ground.
dc), the transmitter turns off and prevents
the battery from fully discharging.
When used, the antenna feed cable is
connected directly to the interface protection
x The dc power source should be
unit. Fifty feet of coaxial cable is provided for
separately fused.
the connection between the interface unit
and the transmitter.
2.2.9 Antenna System
The antenna system must present 50 ± j0 :
2.2.10 Internal gc Source
impedance at the carrier frequency. The
The integral numerically controlled oscillator
transmitter will function while operating into
is the RF drive source. Configure the
a maximum VSWR of 1.5:1, but overall
shorting posts as follows:
system performance will be degraded.
Circuitry within the transmitter will prevent
- E1 in INT position (pins 2 and 3 shorted)
damage to the transmitter from high VSWR
- E2 in INT position (pins 2 and 3 shorted)
loads. Refer to the associated antenna
- E4 in INT position (pins 2 and 3 shorted)
tuning unit’s manual for further information.

2.2.9.1 RF Feed Cable

The RF feed cable must be a 50 : coaxial
cable that is terminated by a type N coaxial
connector. The RF output connector of the
transmitter is located at the top of the
transmitter cabinet.

Page 2-6 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation
 2.2.11 External Interlocks for the opto-coupler associated with each
The external electrical interlock circuit controlled function.
connects between INTERLOCK terminals
TB1-19 and TB1-20 of the remote interface The switching circuit for each remotely
PWB. When it is safe to produce an RF controlled function must be the equivalent of
output, the circuit must be closed and the a normally open/held closed spring-loaded
transmitter must be applying +24 V to (momentary) switch. Each must be
TB1-20. When it is not safe to produce RF configured to operate as a single ended
output (one or more of the external interlock input using the transmitter's unregulated
switches activated), the circuit must provide +24 V as the dc volts source (see Figure
an open circuit to TB1-20. You can install 2-3) or as a differential input using an
any number of serial interlock switches, external dc power supply (24 V to 30 V) as
provided +24 V is removed from TB1-20 if the dc volts source (see Figure 2-4). Each
any interlock switch is activated. control function has positive and negative
input terminals on the remote interface PWB
NOTE to accommodate the selected configuration.
Transients may be induced on the 24 V
source if the external wiring is lengthy. To +24V
prevent this, install a relay controlled by REMOTE
INTERFACE
3 PWB
external interlock switches near the remote E#
1 2
interface PWB. Connect it as a fail-safe relay
(energized when the interlock circuit is
closed, de-energized when it is opened) with
its normally open contacts interconnecting
TB1-19 and TB1- 20. REMOTE SELECTION CIRCUITRY
CONFIGURED FOR INTERNAL
1
DC VOLTS
S1970005 V1
2.2.12 Remote Control Circuits
Figure 2-3 Single Ended Input Selected
You can access transmitter control functions
by an RS232 or RS422 serial port via
Single Ended Input (Internal V dc)
connection to the remote interface PWB.
When using the transmitter’s +24 V as the
See 2.2.15 for a description of the serial port
current source for a control function’s opto-
features. You can control the on/off status,
coupler, configure the remote interface PWB
standby code 1, and standby code 2 using
circuit for a single ended input. Configure the
switching circuits that are either a single
2-socket shunt post on the 3-pin header
ended input or a differential input. The
associated with the control function as
charger alarm can also be monitored
shown in Figure 2-3. Apply a negative logic
remotely.
command (current-sink-to-ground is active)
to the control’s negative (-) input terminal.
NOTE The ground must come from TB1-24.
External control circuits connect to the
transmitter circuits through opto- couplers on
the remote interface PWB. The opto-
couplers buffer/isolate the external circuits
and prevent any transients from affecting
transmitter operation. These opto-couplers
only have influence when Remote control is
selected at the transmitter. The remote
interface PWB contains selection circuits
that allow the user to select an internal
(single ended input) or external (differential
input) dc power supply as the current source

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-7

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
 +24V 2.2.13 Press-To-Talk Input
REMOTE
3
INTERFACE The press-to-talk circuit should be a normally
PWB
1
E#
2
open, single pole switch. When closed
EXTERNAL DC
(press-to-talk), it should apply a ground to
PWR SUPPLY
(+12V TO +30V)
TB1-12. If the press-to-talk information is
phantom fed on the audio shield (TB1-15),
1
REMOTE SELECTION CIRCUITRY the switching circuit is not required (see
CONFIGURED FOR EXTERNAL
DC VOLTS jumper E4 in Table 3-4 and on Figure SD-12).
S1970004 V1
In phantom feed operation, -15 V must be
applied to the shield of the audio input when
Figure 2-4 Differential Input Selected
press-to-talk is to be asserted.
Differential Input (External V dc)
2.2.14 User Assigned Information
When using an external dc voltage (24 V to
Determine the final configuration of the
30 V) as the current source for a control
according to user requirements and
function’s opto-coupler, configure the control
applications. Obtain the following user
function’s external switching circuit and the
assigned information prior to final assembly
remote interface PWB’s selection circuitry
and installation of the transmitter.
for a differential input. Configure the 2-
socket shunt post on the 3-pin header
2.2.14.1 Carrier Frequency
associated with the control function as
Determine the transmitter's assigned carrier
shown in Figure 2-4. The normally open/
frequency.
held closed switch may be located between
the dc voltage's negative output and the
2.2.14.2 Keyed Tone Frequency
negative (-) input terminal (negative logic), or
Determine which keyed tone frequency
between its positive output and the positive
(400 Hz, 1020 Hz or external) is to be used.
(+) input terminal (positive logic).
2.2.14.3 Identification Code
2.2.12.1 On/Off Control
Determine the identification code that has
The remote on/off circuitry (TB1-5/6)
been assigned to the transmitter. Determine if
controls the on/off status of the RF power
the programmable filler space after the last
stage. Activation of this circuit toggles the
character of the identification code is to be no
status between on and off.
tone (CW) or continuous tone (MCW).
2.2.12.2 Charger Alarm
2.2.14.4 Standby Codes
If an external battery charger is used, its
Determine the code variation to be
charger alarm output may be connected to
transmitted as standby '1', noting that options
the transmitter (TB1-3/4) for fault monitoring.
consist of increasing one or more of the no-
tone intervals, between characters of the
2.2.12.3 Standby Code 1
identification code from 3 bits to 5 bits. When
The standby code 1 circuit (TB1-9/10)
the programmable filler space after the last
controls the on/off status of standby code 1
character is continuous tone, the no-tone
generation.
interval between the last character and the
continuous tone may be increased a similar
2.2.12.4 Standby Code 2
amount.
The standby code 2 circuit (TB1-7/8)
controls the on/off status of standby code 2
2.2.15 Serial Port Features
generation.
The Vector transmitter has several serial
port features which allow interfacing to the
remote control/monitor center and the ATU.

Page 2-8 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation
 2.2.15.1 Remote Control and Monitoring packing list. Connectors for remote control/
Interface monitor wiring are included in the ancillary
Remote control and monitoring is optionally kit. Detailed information about these parts is
available over a serial connection. This not included in this manual.
connection can be RS-232, RS-422 or
optionally via modem, USB or TCP/IP. Serial 2.2.18 Parts Not Supplied by Nautel
connections are made to the rear of the Some parts required to complete installation
exciter/control assembly. The modem, USB are not supplied with the transmitter, or are
to serial adapter, and TCP/IP to serial not provided by Nautel. Each installation
adapter plug into the RS-232 connection on dictates the parts required, but users will
the rear of the exciter. normally need to supply the following:

If purchased, the NAPI80 Site Interface x A suitable 50 : RF output coaxial cable,

PWB provides 16 optically isolated monitor terminated by the appropriate RF
points and 16 form C relay contact control connector, complete with inner male
points. Using the front panel GUI, monitor connector at the transmitter end.
points can be configured to indicate alarms
in a high or low logic state and control points x All external control/monitor wiring,
can be configured to automatically toggle on including the associated terminating
any status change in the transmitter. devices and conduit clamps.

2.2.15.2 ATU Interface x All electrical power cables, including

For transmitter systems that use a Nautel conduit, clamps and terminating devices.
ATU-HP or ATU-LP antenna tuning unit, a
serial interface can be established by x Appropriate batteries when the dc option
connecting to the ATU RS-485 25-pin D-sub is purchased.
connector on the rear of the exciter/ control
assembly (A2) (see Figure 2-2). x Appropriate ac breaker and dc fusing

2.2.16 RF Monitoring Sample 2.2.19 Test Equipment and Special

A true sample of the RF output voltage Tools
waveform is provided on the RF MONITOR The test equipment and special tools
BNC connector at the back of the exciter/ required to install and maintain the
control assembly. The RF MONITOR output transmitter are listed in Table 1-1.
should be applied to a station modulation
monitor with a 50 : input impedance. It may 2.2.20 Available Options
also be monitored by an oscilloscope during There are several options available for the
maintenance procedures. The RF Vector transmitter. Each option is described
MONITOR output will be a nominal 1 V below to assist the user in selecting the final
RMS, into a 50 : load, when the RF output configuration.
power level is at rated power.

2.2.17 Parts Supplied by Nautel

An ancillary parts kit is provided with the
transmitter. These parts ensure installation
is not delayed due to lost or damaged parts,
and allow you to maintain the equipment
until a full maintenance spares kit is
obtained. These parts are not intended to be
long-term maintenance spares. The contents
of the ancillary parts kit are itemized in the

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-9

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
2.2.20.1 Standby Side Option 2.2.20.4 Battery Backup Option
The Vector transmitter can be upgraded to If purchased, the battery box (A7) will
accept a set of standby exciter assemblies distribute appropriate voltages to the exciter
and RF power modules, including: and power blocks. When purchased, the dc
box is used in conjunction with a bank of
x RF synthesizer PWB (A2A9) user supplied batteries attached in such a
x Interphase PDM driver PWB (A2A10) manner as to provide 144 V dc and suitable
x LVPS buck converter PWB (A2A11) current to allow the system to operate in
x 24 V Power Supply (A2U3) battery backup mode.
x RF power module (A2 of RF power
blocks) 2.2.20.5 Site Interface Option
The optional site interface PWB (A2A4)
When the standby side components are mounts to the rear of the exciter/control
installed, the transmitter must be placed in assembly (A2) (See Figure 2-2). It can be
NORMAL changeover mode to enable the used to provide 16 control points and 16
standby switching feature. monitor points from a remote location via
terminal block connectors. The active status
2.2.20.2 Spares Kit Option of these control and monitor points can be
A comprehensive maintenance spares kit is configured using the front panel GUI.
available. The kit includes a quantity of each
through-hole semiconductor, LED, and fuse 2.2.20.6 Modem Kit Option
used in the equipment as well as important An optional modem kit (Nautel Part #
repair items such as semiconductor 195-3032) is available. The kit includes a
insulators, fan filters, etc. Multi-Tech Systems MT5634 modem (Nautel
Part # UW66) and its associated cabling.
2.2.20.3 Interface Protection Unit Option The transmitter can be set up for modem
A surge protector panel rated for the ac operation in the RCMS section of the front
power source being applied to the panel GUI.
transmitter is available from Nautel. The
surge protector panel will help protect the 2.3 INSTALLATION
transmitter against lightning-induced voltage All assemblies (listed below) are installed in
transients on the ac power source and/or the the transmitter cabinet for shipping.
antenna system.
x NAH54A, NAH54/01A or NAH54/03A RF
NOTE Combiner/Probe (A1)
Figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the recommended x NAE89A Exciter/Control Assembly (A2)
system installation for high and low power x NAX234B RF Power Block 1 through 4
transmitter systems. These drawings (A3 through A6), as applicable
emphasize the interconnections to the x NAX235/01A or /02 Dc Power
interface protection unit. Distribution Assembly (optional)
x NAX233/01A, /02A or /04A Ac Power
Distribution Assembly

NOTE
Figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the recommended
system installation for high and low power
transmitter systems. These drawings
emphasize the interconnections to the
interface protection unit.

Page 2-10 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation
 Refer to Figure MD-1 for the transmitter’s 2.3.3 Visual Inspection
assembly detail and dimensions. A visual inspection should be performed on
the cabinet, its removable modules/
NOTE assemblies, and printed wiring boards. The
Metric, stainless steel attaching hardware is inspection should cover the following:
used in this transmitter. Unless otherwise
specified, metric wrenches/sockets must be (a) Verify the LCD screen on the exciter/
used, except where an imperial measure is control assembly’s front panel is not
specifically identified. When required, damaged.
replacement hardware should be identical to
the items being replaced. (b) Remove any packing materials (tape,
tyraps) used to secure wiring that was
2.3.1 Acceptance of Shipment disconnected for shipment.
Inspect all shipments for transmitter damage
prior to acceptance. (c) Check for obvious damage and missing
parts.
2.3.2 Unpacking Instructions
Instructions for unpacking are dictated by (d) Check electrical wiring/cabling for
the method of packaging for shipment. broken or frayed insulation, loose or
Transmitters not shipped by electronic improper connections, and broken,
equipment moving specialists may be shorted or pinched conductors.
packed in wooden crates. Instructions
accompany any crate that requires special (e) Verify all hardware is firmly tightened.
unpacking information. Remove all items
from packing and place on a suitable work (f) Remove any unwanted foreign objects
area. Verify shipped contents with packing from the interior of the cabinet/
lists, which provide detailed listings of assemblies, paying particular attention
shipment contents. for floating conductive materials such as
wire strands, metal slivers/filing, and
(a) Remove the transmitter’s side panels. loose hardware.

(b) Remove the packing support bar above (g) Verify that the exciter/control assembly’s
each RF power block (see Figure 2-5), ac plugs (W13P1 -EXCTR AC A and
noting each bar is secured using two M5 W14P1 -EXCTR AC B) are connected to
screws. There may be up to four RF A8J1 and A8J2.
power blocks, depending on the
transmitter’s maximum power capability.

(c) Remove the securing bolts from the side

of the ac power distribution assembly
and the dc power distribution assembly
(if the dc option was purchased).

(d) Reinstall the transmitter’s side panels.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-11

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
Figure 2-5 Removing Packing Support Bars

Page 2-12 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation
 2.3.4 Determining Control/ Table 2-4: ATU Serial Interface
Monitoring Requirements (for INTERNAL RS-485 connector J3)
There are several remote control and
external monitoring options to consider Description Pin
before installing external wiring. The pre-
+5V (ISOL) 1
installation information in paragraph 2.2 GND (ISOL) 2, 6, 25
identifies the remote controls and alarm/ INT BUS (+) 3
status outputs available. It is assumed the INT BUS (-) 4
user has already reviewed this information DE/RE 5
and has determined which will be used. It
is also assumed the options available for
the control inputs and the monitoring Table 2-5: RS-422 Remote Interface
outputs have been reviewed and the user (for RS-422 connector J4)
has determined which options are
required to interface with the external Description Pin
equipment. TX 1
TX 2
2.3.5 Installation of External GND 5
Control/Monitor Wiring RX 7
The wiring from the remote control/ RX 8
monitoring devices is to be connected to
the remote interface PWB (A2A3) as
follows: Table 2-6: RS-232 Remote Interface
(for RS-232 connector J5)
NOTE
Remote control and monitor wiring Description Pin
terminate on the remote interface PWB’s DCD 1
(A2A3) connectors, which protrude RXD 2
through the rear of the exciter/control TXD 3
assembly (A2) (see Figure 2-2). The DTR 4
connectors (included in the ancillary kit) GND 5
DSR 6
are solder-cup type and the terminal
RTS 7
blocks accept wires sizes (AWG) #14 CTS 8
through #24.

A cabinet entry hole for the remote (b) Pass all control/monitor wires,
control/monitor wiring is provided in the including their shields, through a
top left-hand side of the cabinet. Refer to ferrite toroid supplied in the ancillary
Figure 2-2 or MD-1 to determine the cable kit. If practical, the wires should pass
entry location. through each toroid a minimum of two
times (two turns).
(a) Route wires through the hole to the
rear of the exciter/control assembly (c) Determine which remote control
(A2). Using Tables 2-3 through 2-5 inputs are being applied and then
(note the applicable serial interface determine, if applicable, whether they
options), determine the specific are differential or single-ended input.
destination of each wire. See section 2.2.12 (Remote Control
Circuits), for more information on the
type of input.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-13

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
(d) Cut each wire to the required length NOTE
and, if the wire is being terminated at It is recommended the wiring be installed
a terminal block, remove 3/8” (9.5 in a metal conduit and the conduit be
mm) of insulation from the end of rigidly attached to the cabinet at the entry
each conductor; if the wire is being hole. If bottom-entry is desired (when
terminated in one of the connectors, wiring is in a floor mounted trench or the
remove 1/8” (3.2 mm) of insulation transmitter is sitting on a pedestal), a hole
from the end of each conductor. at the bottom, rear of the cabinet is
available for cable entry (see Figure
(e) Insert the control/monitor wiring into MD-1).
the applicable terminals of the remote
interface PWB (A2A3). Ensure the (c) Obtain two 85.7 mm ferrite toroids
terminal block securing screws are (Nautel Part # LP23) from the ancillary
firmly tightened and the adjacent parts kit.
wires do not touch (short).
(d) Route the ac power source wires
(f) If the optional modem kit (Nautel Part through the selected cable entry hole
# 195-3032) is being used, verify to the vicinity of the ac terminal block
connectors P7 and P8 are connected (A8TB3). Refer to Figure 2-2 to
to the modem and connect the phone determine its location.
line to the modem.
(e) Pass all ac power source wires,
2.3.6 Installation of Ac Power including the ground wire, through the
Source Wiring ferrite toroids obtained in step (c). If
Connect the wiring from the ac power practical, wires should pass through a
source to the appropriate terminals of minimum of two times (two turns).
terminal block TB3 of the ac power
distribution assembly (A8), noting it is Table 2-7: Ac Power Connection
located near the bottom of the transmitter
cabinet (see Figure 2-2). Open the rear TERMINAL CONNECTION
door to gain access to the terminal block.
A8TB3-1 LINE1
CAUTION A8TB3-2 LINE2
Verify that the exciter’s ac plugs (W13P1 - A8TB3-4 GROUND
EXCTR AC A and W14P1 -EXCTR AC B)
are connected to A8J1 and A8J2 before (f) Using Table 2-7 as a guide, determine
applying ac to the transmitter. If they are the destination of each wire.
plugged into the wrong outlet at the rear of
A8, permanent damage to the exciter (g) Cut each wire to the required length
power supplies may result. and remove 1.9 cm (3/4 in.) of
insulation from the end of each
(a) Ensure the ac power is switched off at conductor.
the service entrance.
(h) Connect the wiring to the terminals of
(b) Locate the cable entry hole for the ac A8TB1 as tabulated in Table 2-7.
power source wiring in the top or Ensure wiring is securely tightened
bottom of the cabinet (see Figure 2-2 inside the terminal block.
or MD-1).

Page 2-14 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation
 2.3.7 Installation of Dc Power 2.4.2 Turn-On Prerequisites
Source Wiring (optional) Complete the following steps to verify the
Connect the wiring from the dc power transmitter is ready to turn on:
source to the appropriate terminals of
A7TB1 (see Table 2-8). (a) Remove the filter covers (back of A3
through A6, as applicable). Ensure
(a) Disconnect the dc power. that there are no flying lead cables (all
links should be securely fastened).
(b) Interconnect the dc power source with
the transmitter as outlined in the table (b) Ensure that the RF filter PWB (A5) of
below. Ensure wiring is securely each RF power block is tuned for the
tightened. desired frequency (see Table 2-9).

Table 2-8: Dc Power Connection (c) Replace filter covers.

TERMINAL CONNECTION WARNING

If there is a jumper between TB1-19
A7TB1-1 (+) Dc and TB1-20 on remote interface PWB
A7TB1-2 (-) Dc A2A3, safety features controlled by the
A7TB1-3 Charger In external interlocks will be disabled.
A7TB1-4 Charger Out Implement a fail-safe method to alert
personnel to this fact. Dangerous
(c) Apply dc power. Verify the voltage voltages are present on RF output
between A7TB1-1 and A7TB1-2 is stages and the antenna system if the
144 V dc. transmitter is on.

2.4 COMMISSIONING (d) Close all external interlocks or

The following procedures are in a step-by- connect a temporary jumper wire
step format. They permit a person who is between TB1-19 and TB1-20 of the
not familiar with the transmitter to perform remote interface PWB (A2A3).
required checks. Complete the
procedures in sequence. 2.4.3 Initial Turn-On
Ensure that all connectors on the back of
The transmitter is calibrated and burned-in the transmitter are securely fastened. If
during manufacture. Unless otherwise there are any loose connectors, ensure
specified you should not need to make they are mated according to the
any adjustment. If the tests associated connector’s labeled tag.
with a procedure indicate the pre-set
adjustments are not optimum, perform the (a) Close the ac breaker.
appropriate adjustment procedure detailed
in Section 4, Testing and Adjustment prior (b) Verify that the GUI on the front of the
to proceeding with additional tests. exciter is on and displays legible text.

2.4.1 Precautions (c) Confirm that the System Diagram’s

The transmitter contains many solid state Control - RF Off and Local lamps are
devices that can be damaged by on. Confirm that the amber LEDs in the
excessive heat or high voltage transients. RF power modules are all flashing.
Read and observe the precautionary
information included in the operating (d) Measure and record the ac voltage
instructions (see Section 3) prior to between A8TB3-1 and A8TB3-2. It
applying power. should be between 170 and 270 V ac.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-15

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
Table 2-9: RF Filter PWB Tap Settings vs Frequency

Frequency E20 E21 E33 E36 E15 E17

(kHz) To to To To to to
190.0 -209.0 E1 E22 E31 E34 E16 E18
209.1 - 229.9 E2 E23 E31 E34 E16 E18
230.0 - 252.9 E4 E25 E31 E34 E16 E18
253.0 - 278.2 E3 E24 E31 E35 E14 E18
278.3 - 306.0 E5 E26 E31 E35 E14 E18
306.1 - 336.6 E6 E27 E31 E35 E14 E18
336.7 -370.3 E7 E28 E31 E35 E14 E18
370.4 - 407.3 E6 E27 E32 E35 E14 E16
407.4 -447.9 E7 E28 E32 E35 E14 E16
448.0 - 492.9 E8 E29 E32 E35 E14 E16
493.0 - 535.0 E9 E30 E32 E35 E14 E16
With 1 RF power block installed, connect E12 to E11
With 2 or more RF power blocks installed, connect E12 to E10

(e) Set the Requested Power Source to (m) Set the transmitter’s operating side to
AC (see 3.6.9, p. 3-27). A (see 3.6.4).

(f) Clear the Events Log (see 3.6.5, p. (n) For single transmitters, skip to step
3-23). (o). For dual side transmitters, in the
Test Standby Side menu, select Run
(g) Select local control by pressing the All Tests. Each test should take
Control – Local button. about 20 s. OK should be displayed.

(h) Ensure the transmitter’s main side is (o) Set the power level to 0 W
set to B and the monitor mode is set (simultaneously press the Power -
to BYPASS (see 3.6.4, p. 3-22). Increase and Decrease buttons).

(i) Reset the alarm status (see 3.6.3, p. (p) Set the analog meter to display
3-22). The pre-existing alarms should reflected power on the 0 to 400 W
clear. scale (see 3.6.8.2, p. 3-26).

(j) There should be no alarms indicated (q) In the Meters menu, use the f or g
on the System Diagram or GUI. buttons to display the average PA volts
for side A.
(k) Connect the transmitter’s RF output to
a 50 : dummy load rated for twice the
transmitter’s maximum output power.

(l) In the Test Standby Side menu (see

3.6.13.4, p. 3-34), select Run All
Tests. Each test should take about
20 s. OK should be displayed.

Page 2-16 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation
 (r) Slowly increase the RF output until the (x) Increase the RF output to rated power.
PA voltage is 65 V dc while ensuring
the reflected power does not exceed (y) Set the active side to A. The
the reflected power limit of 80 W per transmitter should resume operating at
RF power block (i.e., 80, 160, 240 or full power.
320 W). The output power from each
RF power block should be 90 r 20 W (z) If the dc power source option was not
[e.g., 360 r 80 W with four RF power purchased, proceed to step (dd).
blocks (A3 through A6) installed].
(aa) Apply dc power. In the GUI set the
(s) Increase the RF output to rated power. Requested Power Source to BOTH
If a dual side system was not (see 3.6.9, p. 3-27).
purchased, proceed to step (z).
(bb) Open the ac circuit breaker. The
(t) Set power to 0 W. Press RF Off. Set transmitter should continue to run at
the active side to B. full power on the dc source (battery).

(u) There should be no alarms indicated (cc) Close the ac circuit breaker. The
on the System Diagram or the GUI. transmitter should return to operating
in ac mode.
(v) In the Meters menu, use the f or g
buttons to display the average PA volts (dd) Complete the Standard Adjustments in
for side B. Section 4 of this manual.

(w) Increase the RF output until the PA (ee) Set the RF output power to 0 W. Press
voltage is 65 V dc while ensuring the Control - RF Off.
reflected power does not exceed the
reflected power limit of 80 W per cube
(i.e., 80, 160, 240 or 320 W). The
output from each RF power block
should be 90 r 20 W [e.g., 360 r 80 W
with four RF power blocks (A3 through
A6) installed].

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 2-17

Section 2 Preparation for Use and Installation Issue 2.0
 SPU1
NDB/DGPS
INTERFACE/
PROTECTION EXTERNAL CONTROL/MONITOR
UNIT
AUX CABLE
FERRITE EXTERNAL AUDIO OR MSK INPUT
*
VECTOR
TRANSMITTER *
REMOTE CONTROL/
(LESS THAN 1500W) MONITOR CENTER
*
REMOTE CONTROL/MONITOR
SERIAL LINK (PTSN, RS-232, RS-422, USB)

*
ATU VDC (OPTIONAL)

ATU-LP
* OR
RS-485 ISOLATED ATU-HP
INT SERIAL LINK
RF CABLE ANTENNA
FERRITE FEEDER
*
RF FEED FROM TRANSMITTER RF FEED TO ANTENNA
(NAUTEL P/N 151-1283-01) ANTENNA SYSTEM SYSTEM
J1 GROUND

PWR CABLE
FERRITE
*

STATION
REFERENCE
GROUND
* DENOTES CABLE LENGTH TO BE
20 FEET (6 METRES)

AC
POWER AC INPUT
SOURCE (OPTIONAL)

STATION SPU1 PARTS SHOWN

REFERENCE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
GROUND B1510096 VA

Dimensions = mm (inches)

Block Diagram – Recommended Low Power Transmitter System Installation

Issue 2.0 Not to Scale Figure 2-6 Page 2-18
 EXTERNAL CONTROL/MONITOR
AUX CABLE
FERRITE EXTERNAL AUDIO OR MSK INPUT
*
VECTOR
TRANSMITTER *
REMOTE CONTROL/
(GREATER THAN 1500W) MONITOR CENTER
*
REMOTE CONTROL/MONITOR
SERIAL LINK (PTSN, RS-232, RS-422, USB)

*
ATU VDC (OPTIONAL)

* ATU-HP
RS-485 ISOLATED
INT SERIAL LINK
RF CABLE ANTENNA
FERRITE FEEDER
*
RF FEED FROM TRANSMITTER RF FEED TO ANTENNA
ANTENNA SYSTEM SYSTEM
GROUND

SPU2
NDB/DGPS
PWR CABLE INTERFACE/
FERRITE PROTECTION
* UNIT

STATION
REFERENCE
GROUND
* DENOTES CABLE LENGTH TO BE
20 FEET (6 METRES)

AC
POWER AC INPUT
SOURCE (OPTIONAL)

STATION SPU2 PARTS SHOWN

REFERENCE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
GROUND B1510097 VA

Dimensions = mm (inches)

Block Diagram – Recommended High Power Transmitter System Installation

Issue 2.0 Not to Scale Figure 2-7 Page 2-19
Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Section 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3.1 INTRODUCTION x If in local or remote control, press the RF
The following instructions are intended Off switch on the transmitter’s front panel.
primarily for persons involved in testing or
maintenance of the equipment. x If in remote control, select RF Off at the
remote control site.
3.1.1 Precautions
The Vector transmitter contains many solid x Open any external interlock switch.
state devices that can be damaged if they are
subjected to excessive heat or high voltage 3.2.2 Complete Shutdown
transients. Ensure the circuits are not When the cause of the emergency shutdown
overdriven and are not disconnected from dictates the need for a complete shutdown of
their loads while turned on. the transmitter, do the following:

3.2 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN x Switch off the ac power source at the ac

If an emergency shutdown is necessary, no power entrance.
special precautions are required. However,
the type of shutdown is dictated by the x If applicable, disconnect the battery.
reason for the shutdown. There are two
types of shutdown. The first turns off the RF 3.3 EXTERNAL SAFETY INTERLOCK
output by inhibiting the power output stages. The external electrical interlock circuit is a
The second turns off the RF output and protection circuit controlled by user
disables all of the internal power supplies by determined, serially connected, normally
disconnecting the ac and dc power sources. open/held closed interlock switches. It inhibits
the RF output when it is not safe to produce
3.2.1 Turn Off RF Output RF output.
When the cause of the emergency shutdown
is external to the transmitter or is in the RF When all of the external interlock switches are
output portion of the transmitter, the following closed and it is safe to produce an RF output,
will turn off the RF power produced by the the exciter panel's system diagram External
power modules: Alarm lamp will be off. The operator will have
full control of transmitter functions.
WARNING
The following will not remove the ac or dc When any external interlock switch is open,
power source voltage from the the RF output stages will automatically turn
transmitter or inhibit any of the internal off. The exciter panel's system diagram
low voltage dc supplies or the B+ power External Alarm lamp will turn on (alarm
supply. If the reason for the shutdown state). It is not possible to enable the RF
requires all voltages be turned off, power stages until all of the external interlock
proceed directly to paragraph 3.2.2 switches are closed.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-1

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.4 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE 3.4.4 Stress Current Protection
PROTECTION Always ensure the static sensitive
The transmitter's assemblies contain semiconductor devices are protected from
semiconductor devices that are susceptible unnecessary stress current. This is
to damage from electrostatic discharge achieved by ensuring:
(ESD). Observe the following precautions
when handling an assembly that contains x Current is not flowing when an electrical
these devices: connection is broken.

NOTE x Voltages are not present on external

Electrostatic energy is produced when two control/monitoring circuits when they
insulating materials are rubbed together. A are connected.
person wearing rubber-soled shoes,
walking across a nylon carpet or a waxed 3.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
floor can generate an extremely large Nautel recommends the operator/
electrostatic charge. This effect is maintainer be familiar with the transmitter's
magnified during periods of low humidity. controls and indicators before operating the
transmitter and/or attempting to perform
This high voltage may damage fault diagnostics. In most cases, controls
semiconductor devices such as integrated and indicators are presented in an
circuits, field-effect transistors, thyristors assembly-by assembly format. A
and Schottky diodes unless adequate mechanical drawing and an associated
precautions are taken. table are provided as aids to locating and
understanding the assembly’s controls and
3.4.1 Discharging of Personnel indicators.
Maintainers must be electrically discharged
by a suitable ground system (anti-static NOTE
mats, grounding straps) when removing an On some mechanical drawings, numbered
assembly from the transmitter and while callouts are provided to cross-reference the
handling the assembly for maintenance control/indicator to the description table.
procedures.
The names used in the PANEL MARKING
3.4.2 Handling/Storage column of the controls and indicators tables
Place the assembly in an anti-static bag are intended to be the closest possible
when it is not installed in a host transmitter representation to the item’s
or when it is not being subjected to label/silkscreen.
maintenance procedures. Electronic
components should be stored in anti-static
materials.

3.4.3 Tools/Test Equipment

Testing and maintenance equipment,
including soldering and unsoldering tools,
should be suitable for contact with static
sensitive semiconductor devices.

Page 3-2 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 3.5.1 Front Panel x Diagnostic Display – a menu-driven
The front panel is the primary local user user interface screen - with five
interface for the transmitter. Control and associated push-buttons - which allows
indicators are grouped into four sections of control and monitoring of the transmitter’s
the panel (see Figure 3-1) as follows: critical parameters and modes of
operation. Refer to paragraph 3.6 for a
x System Diagram - a simple block full description of the diagnostic display.
diagram of the transmitter complete with
alarm lamps. Refer to Figure 3-2 and x Analog Meter – the front panel meter
Table 3-1 for a description of the controls displays a user selected analog sample
and indicators. on a user selected scale. Scale selection
and meter enabling is done using the
x Control – push-button switches that diagnostic display (refer to paragraph
allow convenient control of the 3.6.8).
transmitter’s RF status (on or off and
increase or decrease) and its operator
control source (local or remote). The RF
Off switch is functional regardless of
local or remote selection. Refer to
Figure 3-3 and Table 3-2 for a
description of the controls and
indicators.

Figure 3--1 Vector Transmitter Front Panel (Primary User Interface)

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-3

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.5.2 Exciter Interface PWB covered in previous paragraphs. Refer to
Controls and Indicators the mechanical drawings section to locate
Figure 3-4 and Table 3-3 identify and a referenced item.
describe the controls and indicators on the
exciter interface PWB (A2A2). 3.5.6 Miscellaneous RF Power
Block Controls and Indicators
3.5.3 Remote Interface PWB Table 3-7 describes the miscellaneous
Controls and Indicators controls and indicators of the RF power
Figure 3-5 and Table 3-4 identify and block (A3 through A6 as applicable). Refer
describe the controls and indicators on the to the mechanical drawings section to
remote interface PWB (A2A3). locate a referenced item.

3.5.4 RF Synthesizer PWB Controls 3.5.7 Ac Power Distribution

and Indicators Assembly Controls
Figure 3-6 and Table 3-5 identify and Figure 3-7 and Table 3-8 identify and
describe the controls and indicators on the describe the controls on the ac power
RF synthesizer PWBs (A2A5 and, if distribution assembly (A8).
installed, A2A9).
3.5.8 Dc Power Distribution
3.5.5 Miscellaneous Exciter/ Assembly Controls
Control Assembly Controls and Figure 3-8 and Table 3-9 identify and
Indicators describe the controls on the dc power
Table 3-6 describes the miscellaneous distribution assembly (A7).
controls and indicators of the exciter
control/assembly (A2) that were not

System Diagram

Exciter Output
IPA/ Network
PA

Changeover

Low Voltage
Power Supply

External
Alarm

AC Mains Power Supply

Figure 3--2 Vector Transmitter Front Panel – System Diagram Section

Page 3-4 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-1: Front Panel - System Diagram Controls and Indicators
PANEL MARKING DESCRIPTION
Exciter When turned on (red), typically indicates a failure has occurred in
the active exciter (side A or B). This alarm will initiate a changeover
in dual transmitters; the side of the transmitter designated as
standby will be operating as the active side.

Low Voltage Power When turned on (red), indicates the active LVPS module (A2A7 or
Supply A2A11) has failed.

AC Mains When turned on (red), indicates the ac voltage applied to the

transmitter has fallen below an acceptable level. If the battery
backup option is installed, the power source switches to battery
mode. If no battery is available, the transmitter’s RF output is
inhibited.

Power Supply When turned on (red), indicates a fault has occurred in one or more
of the switching power supplies that supply the RF power modules
This alarm will initiate a changeover in dual transmitters; the side of
the transmitter designated as standby will be operating as the active
side.

External Alarm When turned on (red), indicates the external interlock circuit is not
presenting a closed circuit (inhibiting RF power) OR the ATU
(optional) or site interface PWB (optional) are not responding OR the
battery voltage is below the user established threshold.

Changeover When turned on (red), indicates a changeover to the standby side

has been enabled due to a fault in the main side.

IPA/PA When turned on (red), indicates a fault has occurred in one of the
RF power modules. This alarm will initiate a changeover in dual
transmitters; the side of the transmitter designated as standby will
be operating as the active side.

Output Network When turned on (red), indicates the transmitter’s RF power is being
cut back or shut back due to an impedance mismatch (high VSWR)
at the transmitter’s output.

NOTE
In each case, root-cause details of the fault are displayed in the
diagnostic display’s Events Logs (see paragraph 3.6.5)

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-5

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
Figure 3--3 Vector Transmitter Front Panel – Control Section

Page 3-6 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-2: Front Panel - Control Section Controls and Indicators
PANEL
DESCRIPTION
MARKING
Power Increase Pushbutton switch that increases the RF output power level of the
transmitter. RF power is increased from minimum power to maximum
power in approximately 200 steps. Each step will increase the output
voltage of the switch mode power supplies to the RF power modules
linearly – the RF output power increase will follow a square law.
Pressing and holding the switch increases the rate of change.

Power Decrease Pushbutton switch that decreases the RF output power level of the
transmitter. RF power is decreased from maximum power to minimum
power in approximately 200 steps. Each step will decrease the output
voltage of the switch mode power supplies to the RF power modules
linearly – the RF output power decrease will follow a square law.
Pressing and holding the switch increases the rate of change.

Local Pushbutton switch that sets control of transmitter functions to switches

on the front panel. When its integral lamp is on (amber) (by pressing the
switch), Local control has been selected.

When Local control is selected, all of the remote control circuits (except
the external interlock and RF off function) are disabled.

Remote Pushbutton switch that sets control of transmitter functions to remote

control circuits. When its integral lamp is on (amber) (by pressing the
switch), Remote control has been selected.

When Remote control is selected, all pushbutton switches on the

exciter’s front panel that execute control functions, except the RF Off
switch, are disabled and have no influence. The RF Off switch is still
enabled to ensure the RF power stage can be turned off locally in the
event of an emergency.

RF On Push button switch that turns on the transmitter's RF power stage and
cooling fans when it is pressed. Its integral lamp will be on when the RF
power stage is turned on. Transmitter will operate at the level stored in
the selected power pre-set.

RF Off Push button switch that turns off the transmitter's RF power stage when
it is pressed. Its integral lamp will be on when the RF power stage is
turned off.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-7

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
 E1
C4

1
J15 Q1
R3
E1

2
C5
R4 R5

1
Q2 C6
1
R6
R7
U4 C7
Q3
R8
R9
C8
Q4 R10
R11 C9
HR10

C10 R12
2

Q5
E2 CR23
+
C12
C11
R14 E11
TERMINAL,TESTPOINT,PWB,YELLOW

R13
R35 CR1
R36 1 E11
E3 CR24 DGPS BEACON
CR2
E2 1 2
1 E10 E10
DGPS BEACON
E3 1 2
CR3
R15

1
1

R31 CR25 R16

R32 CR26 R17
+ C13
C27

TP3
R18

J11
R37 CR27 C14
J6

R38 CR28 R40

+ C21
C28

E4
1
E4
DGPS BEACON
J4

R19
R20
R21
E5
1

1 E5
A K DGPS BEACON
R22
+

CR4
C16

J16

R23
L2 1 E6 E6
DGPS BEACON
R24
L3
R25
1
+

CR5 R26
C17

L4
+

R27
C18

CR6 R28
R29
A

C19
CR7

TP4

R30
K

C20
CR8
R39
1

C15
Q6 Q7
CR9 CR10
J5

K1 K2
1

CR11 CR12
A K A K
CR13 CR14
J10

1
E7
E7
DGPS BEACON
CR18
K A
+

A K
C22

CR15
E8
L6

1 2 E8
L7
1 2 E9 E9
+

CR16
C23

Figure 3--4 Part of NAPI76A/01 Exciter Interface PWB A2A2

Page 3-8 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-3: Exciter Interface PWB Controls and Indicators
PANEL
REF DES DESCRIPTION
MARKING

E1, E2, Key CW Shorting jumpers that are installed in positions determined by
E3, E8, Jumpers the type of transmitter. In NDB transmitters, the jumpers are
E9 factory installed in position 2. No user adjustment is required.

E4, E5, DGPS/BEACON Bi-position selection jumpers that are installed in positions
E6, E7, Jumpers determined by the type of transmitter. In NDB transmitters,
E10, E11 the jumpers are factory installed to short pins 2 and 3. No
user adjustment is required.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-9

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
 MONITOR R37
RF FR EQUENCY

J8

PR OBES POW ER SUPPLY

AUDIO
INTER NAL R S-485 LEV EL
R 37
J11 J12

STANDBY CODE 1
J3 1 TP2 1
TP3

PDM INHIBIT/

INTERLOCK
1

R F ON/OFF
CHAR GER

MONITOR
STANDBY
R F OFF/
CODE 2
R F ON/
ALAR M

AUDIO

AUDIO
INPUT
TO-TALK
GND

PR ESS-

EX T
GND

GND

GND
+ - + - + - + - +SHLD - + SHLD -
R S-422 R S-232 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

TP10 TB1

J4 J5 J22
1
1 TP11 1

R EMOTE INTER FACE

NAPI78
SER .
C87
TP9
NOR M GND
10MHz (A)
HD-R PHASE
10MHz
R168
10MHz (B)
TP8

R 164
L11

C127

C126
MONITOR
LEVEL R 168 E11
C123 R 152
R 166 NOR M BY PASS R 153
R 167 1 E11
R 165
C103 C105 CR 21

U23
C125
C118
C124
C119

U16
AUDIOAUDIO HD-R 1 J13
C120
FILTER A L12
R 161
C4 EX CITER
B
R 96 C100

R 13 C45
R4

J18
L2 L4 L6
R 14
R5 C6 L3
C29 C36
R6 R 27 C46 C52
C7 R 81 J16 J17
U1

C1 C12 C30 C39 C41

C42 C47 C55 C58
R1 C31 C35
R 17 C51 1 R 87 R 91 R 30 1

CR 20
C2 C8 R 63 R 72 C59 C80
NOR M NDB C60
Q7
U21
R 92

C20 C69 C81

R 82 C82
R9
U8
TP2

C61 C70
C78+
U11

R 83 C71 R 93 C122
R 34
U3

R 12
R 77 R 84 R 85 C72 R 94 R 169
C9 CR 2 C15 C16 C22 THR ESHOLD R 78
R 19
R 98 TP5
CR 11 TP3 CR 22 C64 R 88 R 106 C98 R 33 R 132 R 136
C3 R 97 R 99 C107
R 73 C54 C56 R 86 C73
U13

CR 3 R 22 CR 12 R 100 C88 C102 R 137

R 31 R 74 R 48 R 156 C65 R 89 TP6 C108NOR M NDB
C89 1 E13
1 R 101 R 144
U10

C13 C21 C49 C57

U15

C74 R 133
U14

U17

R 158 R 102 R 109 NOR M

T1 R 55 C66 R 134 NDB
R 28 CR 9 TP7 TP12
R 90 R 103 R 110
1 E14
R 23 R 26 TP4 GND
R 29 C23 R 139 R 159 R 135
A B E17 GND NOR M NDB
U9

C75 1
TP1
C17 R 114
E4 NOR M NDB R 145 R 160 CR 25 C109 E15
R 18
U18

GND R 32 1 1 R 170
U6

U7

R 142
CR 10 R 171
R 38 C106 R 143
TP10
1

C34 C40 C44

SINGLE

SINGLE

SINGLE

SINGLE

R 15 C50 TP11
L1 C83 C94
CR 15 CR 16 CR 17 L8 L9 C112
DIFF

DIFF

DIFF

DIFF

CR 18 L7
U19

C10 R 162 C26 C79 C95

U12
E5

E6

E7

E8

C67 C76 C84 C113

R 16 E18 R 50 R 53 R 70 R 75
CR 26
R 130 R 138
CR 1 1 1 1 1 1 R 76 C68 C77 C85 R 131
R 51 R 54 R 71 C62 R 105
NOR M BATTER Y R 123

M1950191 V 2

E18 E4 E5 – E8 E17 E13 - E15

Figure 3--5 Part of NAPI78D/01 Remote Interface PWB A2A3

Page 3-10 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-4: Remote Interface PWB Controls and Indicators

PANEL
REF DES DESCRIPTION
MARKING
E4 Press-To- Bi-position selection jumper that is installed based on the type
Talk/Phantom of mode to enable voice operation. The jumper is factory
Feed installed for ‘press-to-talk’ mode, position A (shorting pins 1
and 2). For ‘phantom feed’ mode, install the jumper in
position B (shorting pins 2 and 3). In ‘press-to-talk’ mode a
ground is applied to TB1-12 to enable voice. In ‘phantom
feed’ mode, -15 V is applied to the shield of the audio to
enable voice.

E5 – E8 Single/ Bi-position selection jumpers that configure the remote

Differential interface PWB to accept either single-ended or differential
remote control inputs.

x A differential input is selected when the jumper shorts

pins 1 and 2 of its associated 3-pin header.

x A single-ended input is selected when the jumper shorts

pins 2 and 3 of its associated 3-pin header.

E11 NORMAL/ Factory default is shorting pins 1 and 2. No user adjustment

BYPASS is required.

E13 – E15 NORM/NDB Bi-position selection jumpers that are installed in positions
E17 determined by the type of transmitter. In NDB transmitters,
the jumpers are factory installed in the NDB position (shorting
pins 2 and 3). No user adjustment is required.

E18 NORM/ Bi-position selection jumper that should always be installed in

BATTERY the NORM position (shorting pins 1 and 2).

R37 AUDIO LEVEL Adjusted for 100% modulation when the modulating audio is
(accessed from between 0 dBm and +12 dBm and its amplitude is the level
rear of exciter, that is expected to produce 100% modulation.
see Figure 2-2)

R168 MONITOR Adjusted to set the level of the RF MONITOR output, which is
LEVEL a sample of the RF output. This output is located on BNC
connector J8 on the rear of the exciter/control assembly).

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-11

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
 E1/E2 S1-S5 E3 E6 S6 R41 R32

IPM BAL
NAPE NAUTEL ASSY
10MHz R40
194-3060
SER.
C11

C13

C10

REF
C5

RF SYNTHESIZER R39 R41

R44
INPUT J2 U13
R7
CR4 1 2 3 4 R36
R1 C23
C12
R23 S6 C49
R51
C6 R20
R22 L10 OPEN C45
C14 C25
U5 Q4 TP5
C8

TP4 R38

C53
C52
C51
C50
C15
U1 L1 GND
R5

C27 R37
C18

L3

R30
C21 C28 C56 C54
R14
R25 CR5 +
C2 TP1 R6 + R10 C29
C16
C17
C9

C7

C42
R26 R42
1 E1 C47 R11 SYMMETRY ADJ C32
REF

EXT INT R28

L8

R9 U10 1 E6
R31
1 E2 R29 ENABLE DISABLE
R8

SYMMETRY
R35
C3 C48
R13

1
U3 CR6
CR3 R32
R12
U4 R34 R33
CR2 TP6
PDM C46
C44
C4

+ 1 E3 R27
C37 U12
LOW HIGH SOURCE
R4
1 E4

J1
R17
L6 R3 EXT INT TP7
+ Q1 Q2 Q3
R18
FREQUENCY (kHz) C43 CR1 + L4
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 R19 C33 C30 E5
C57
L9

x1000 x100 x10 x1 x0.1 + R2 A

C39

C38 R48 C58 B

901 901 901 901 901
8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 R49 Q6 Q5 C1 C
L7 D
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 R43
654 654 654 654 654 R50 + R46 E
R45 + C31
R47 F
C34

U2 C41
TP2

R16 L5 G
GRID1 1 R52
R15 +
6 TP3 C19 C20 C40
U11 R21
5 GND C55
4 +
C35 3 3 2 1 C26 +
3 C24
C22

2 U9
1
U6 U7 C36
A B C D E F U8
L2

4 4

M1940145 V1
E4 E5
FREQUENCY (kHz)
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
x1000 x100 x10 x1 x0.1
901 901 901 901 901
8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3
654 654 654 654 654

0 3 8 7 5
SHOWN SET FOR 387.5 kHz

Figure 3-6 Assembly Detail – NAPE70C RF Synthesizer PWB A2A5 and A2A9

Page 3-12 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-5: RF Synthesizer PWB Controls and Indicators
ITEM PANEL
DESCRIPTION
(Ref MARKING
E1 REFERENCE (A) Part of a bi-position selector circuit used to configure the RF
synthesizer PWB to use either the output of an integral
E2 REFERENCE (B) crystal controlled oscillator or an external RF generator as
the RF drive source.
E4 RF Drive Source
See the chart below for the proper RF drive configuration
settings of the three pin header posts E1, E2, and E4.
Always set for Internal gc for Vector transmitters.

E1 E2 E4
Internal gc 2-3 2-3 2-3
External gc 2-3 2-3 1-2

E3 PDM High/Low Bi-position selection jumper used to configure the RF

synthesizer PWB for high PDM (nominal 130 kHz) or low
PDM (nominal 65 kHz). Always set to HIGH PDM (shorting
pins 2 and 3) for Vector transmitters.

E5 Drive Matching Seven selection jumper (A-G) used to configure the RF drive
circuit for its host transmitter. The jumper is installed in the D
position (shorting pins 7 and 8) for Vector transmitters.

E6 Symmetry Bi-position selection jumper used to enable or disable the RF

Adjust drive symmetry adjustment circuitry. Always set to ENABLE
Enable/Disable (E6 installed between pins 1 and 2 of its 3-pin header) for
Vector transmitters.

R32 RF DRIVE Adjusted to obtain an RF oscillator drive waveform that is a

SYMMETRY symmetrical square wave.
R41 IPM BAL Not applicable to Vector transmitters.

S1-S5 X1000 Adjusts the carrier frequency in 1000 kHz steps.

X100 Adjusts the carrier frequency in 100 kHz steps.
X10 Adjusts the carrier frequency in 10 kHz steps.
X1 Adjusts the carrier frequency in 1000 Hz steps.
X0.1 Adjusts the carrier frequency in 100 Hz steps.

S6:1/2/3 Correction Not applicable to Vector transmitters.

Selection

S6:4 Enable/Disable Always closed for Vector transmitters.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-13

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
Table 3-6: Miscellaneous Exciter/Control Assembly Controls and Indicators

PANEL
REF DES DESCRIPTION
MARKING
A1E1 A/B No user adjustment should be required. Always installed in
A1E2 position B.

A1E3 A/B No user adjustment should be required. Always installed

between pins 1 and 3.

A1LS1 SPEAKER Provides an audible signal for local monitoring of the

demodulated keyed tone (identification code).

A6E1 A/B No user adjustment should be required. Always installed in

or position A.
A10E1

A6R31 GAIN TRIM Adjusted, when interphase PDM driver PWB is enabled (the
or associated exciter is the active exciter). Compensates for
A10R31 tolerance differences between exciter 'A' and exciter 'B' in
dual exciter transmitters. One or both must be adjusted to set
the PDM pulse train to produce identical RF output levels
when either exciter is selected (see 4.3.6.11).

A6R59 DUMP Not applicable to Vector transmitters.

or
A10R59

A8E1 A/B No user adjustment should be required. Always installed in

A8E3 position B.
or
A12E1
A12E3

A8E2 KEYED CW/ Bi-position selection jumpers that are installed in positions
or NORMAL determined by the type of transmitter. In Vector transmitters,
A12E2 the jumpers are factory installed in the NORMAL position
(shorting pins 2 and 3). No user adjustment is required.

NOTE: Prefix all items with A2 to obtain complete reference designation.

Page 3-14 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-7: Miscellaneous RF Power Block Controls and Indicators

PANEL
REF DES DESCRIPTION
MARKING

A1A1DS1 MODULE When turned on (amber), indicates that RF power module A

or INSTALLED or B is installed in the transmitter.
A2A1DS1

A1A1DS2 MODULE ON When turned on (green), indicates that RF power module A

or or B is on and is contributing to the transmitter’s RF output.
A2A1DS2

A1A1DS3 MODULE FAULT When turned on (red), indicates that a fault has occurred in
or RF power module A or B and it is not contributing to the
A2A1DS3 transmitter’s RF output.

A1A2DS1 AC IND When turned on (amber), indicates the ac input voltage is

or being applied to RF power module A or B.
A2A2DS1

A1A2DS2 +18V When turned on (green), indicates the +24 V power supply
or voltage is being applied to RF power module A or B and that
A2A2DS2 the +18 V regulator is functioning.

A1A3F1 +15V Fuses the +15 V applied from the power module control/
or interface PWB to the power amplifier at 1 A.
A2A3F1

A1A5DS1 B+ ON When turned on (green), indicates that the B+ voltage is

or being applied from the switch mode power supply PWB (or
A2A5DS1 optional battery) to the modulator.

A5E1 RF Filter Frequency dependent jumpers that are factory installed for
through Jumpers the customer operating frequency. If a frequency change is
A5E36 required, change the position of these jumpers (see Figure
MD-22).

NOTE: Prefix all items with A3 through A6, as applicable, to obtain complete reference
designation.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-15

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
Figure 3--7 NAX233/01A, /02A & /04A Ac Power Distribution Assembly A8 (Rear View)

Page 3-16 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-8: Ac Power Distribution Assembly Controls and Indicators

PANEL
REF DES DESCRIPTION
MARKING
F1/F2 Exciter A Fuse the line (F1) and neutral (F2) of the ac voltage applied
to exciter A at 10 A.

F3/F4 Exciter B Fuse the line (F3) and neutral (F4) of the ac voltage applied
to exciter B at 10 A.

F5/F6 Side A – Fuse the line (F5) and neutral (F6) of the ac voltage applied
Power Block 1 to RF power block 1, side A at 10 A.

F7/F8 Side B – Fuse the line (F7) and neutral (F8) of the ac voltage applied
Power Block 1 to RF power block 1, side B at 10 A.

F9/F10 Side A – Fuse the line (F9) and neutral (F70) of the ac voltage applied
Power Block 2 to RF power block 2, side A at 10 A.

F11/F12 Side B – Fuse the line (F11) and neutral (F12) of the ac voltage
Power Block 2 applied to RF power block 2, side B at 10 A.

F13/F14 Side A – Fuse the line (F13) and neutral (F14) of the ac voltage
Power Block 3 applied to RF power block 3, side A at 10 A.

F15/F16 Side B – Fuse the line (F15) and neutral (F16) of the ac voltage
Power Block 3 applied to RF power block 3, side B at 10 A.

F17/F18 Side A – Fuse the line (F17) and neutral (F18) of the ac voltage
Power Block 4 applied to RF power block 4, side A at 10 A.

F19/F20 Side B – Fuse the line (F19) and neutral (F20) of the ac voltage
Power Block 4 applied to RF power block 4, side B at 10 A.

NOTE: Prefix all items with A8 to obtain complete reference designation.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-17

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
Figure 3--8 NAX235/01A & /02 Dc Power Distribution Assembly A7

Page 3-18 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-9: Dc Power Distribution Assembly Controls and Indicators

PANEL
REF DES DESCRIPTION
MARKING
A2DS1 DC When turned on (amber), indicates the dc input voltage is
being applied to battery boost PWB A2 from dc-dc converter
U1.
A2DS2 +18V When turned on (green), indicates the +18 V regulator is
functioning.

F1 Dc Supply - Fuses the dc supply voltage (from dc-dc converter U1)

Exciter applied to the exciter stage at 12 A.

F2 Dc Supply – Fuses the dc supply voltage (from dc-dc converter U1)

RF Power applied to the RF power stage (RF power block 1) at 12 A.

F3** Dc Supply – Fuses the dc supply voltage (from dc-dc converter U1)
RF Power applied to the RF power stage (RF power block 2) at 12 A.

F4 Dc Supply – Fuses the positive (+) end of the battery input voltage
Battery Input (between 128 and 168 V) applied to the LINE input (terminal
1) of line filter U2 at 20 A.

NOTE: Prefix all items with A7 to obtain complete reference designation.

This assembly is an optional item for VR500 and VR1000 transmitters only.

** - Denotes used on NAX235/02 variations (VR1000) only.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-19

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
 STATUS BAR
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Forward Power: 0W METER
0 600 1200
SELECTION
METER Reflec. Power: 0.0W
SCROLL
SELECTIONS 0 100 200
VSWR: 1.00
0 1 2 SOFT KEY
LABELS
Main Menu Status Power

Figure 3-9 Diagnostic Display – Meters Screen

SOFTWARE
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Main Menu Vector Transmitter VERSION
Exciter Control
SUB-MENU Events Log rev 0. 0. 0. 4
SELECTIONS Settings Aug 17 2005
Peripherals Nautel Limited
RCMS Settings
Select Meters

Figure 3-10 Diagnostic Display – Main Menu

3.6 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY 3.6.2 Main Screens

The diagnostic display (see Figure 3-9), in The high level screens of the diagnostic
the centre of the transmitter’s front panel, is display (Figures 3-8 and 3-9) display:
a 240 x 64 graphic LCD display and is the
primary local user interface for the x Transmitter status bar
transmitter. With the exception of RF on/ x Three user-definable meter selections
off and local/remote control, all transmitter x Meter selection scroll (controlled by f
functions can be controlled and indicated and g pushbuttons)
by this display. All critical parameters and x Sub-menu selections
events are monitored from this display. The x Software version
following paragraphs describe how to use
the diagnostic display. 3.6.2.1 Transmitter Status Bar
The transmitter status bar is the
3.6.1 Pushbutton Switches information displayed along the top of the
Navigating the diagnostic display is done diagnostic display. This information is
using the five pushbutton switches present at all times and indicates the
adjacent the display. The up (f) and down following (from left to right):
(g) pushbuttons, to the right of the display,
are used to move up and down through x Current time (24-hour clock)
displayed selections and to increase or x Current output power
decrease the value of a selected x Active side (A or B)
parameter. Pressing and holding the f or x Monitor mode (blank for normal or
g pushbutton will increase the rate of Bypass) – bypass indicates that
change, where applicable. There are also automatic changeover is inhibited.
three  soft-key pushbuttons whose
functions are defined by the text displayed For quick reference, locate the desired
directly above them for a given menu. function in the flow diagram depicted in
Figure 3-11, then refer to the referenced
paragraph for further information.

Page 3-20 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Diagnostic Display (GUI) Functions Reference
(organized by menu hierarchy) Paragraph
MAIN MENU

Meters
Status 3.6.3
Power 3.6.14
Changeover Control 3.6.4
Events Log 3.6.5
Settings
Set Real Time Clock 3.6.6
Monitor Settings 3.6.7
Monitor Timeout 3.6.7 (b)
Power Thresholds 3.6.7 (d)
Automatic Reset 3.6.7 (f)
Mod % Thresholds 3.6.7 (h)
Meter Settings 3.6.8
Change Meter Groups 3.6.8.1
Select Analog Meter 3.6.8.2
Calibrate Analog Meter 3.6.8.3
Power Source Select 3.6.9
Configure Sonalert 3.6.10
Timed Shutdown 3.6.11
Factory Settings 3.6.12
Calibrate Digital Meters 3.6.12.1
Set Thresholds 3.6.12.2
Maximum Output Gain 3.6.12.3
Use Factory Settings 3.6.12.4
Peripherals 3.6.13
Keyer Settings 3.6.13.1
Audio Levels 3.6.13.1 (a)
Keyer Modulation 3.6.13.1 (b)
Keyer Sequence 3.6.13.1 (c)
Standby Code 1 3.6.13.1 (d)
Standby Code 2 3.6.13.1 (d)
Power Modules 3.6.13.2
ATU Controls 3.6.13.3
Test Standby Side 3.6.13.4
Select Peripherals 3.6.13.5
Module Check 3.6.13.6
RCMS Settings 3.6.14
Control Points 3.6.14.1
Monitor Points 3.6.14.2
Serial Setting 3.6.14.3
Automatic Reporting 3.6.14.4

Figure 3-11 – Flow Diagram - Diagnostic Display Functions

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-21

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.6.3 Viewing Faults 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
In addition to the system diagram’s fault Forward Power: 0W
0 600 1200
indicators, a list of current faults can be Reflec. Power: 0.0W
viewed on the diagnostic display. View the list 0 100 200
VSWR: 1.00
of faults as follows: 0 1 2
Main Menu Status Power
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Forward Power: 0W
0 600 1200
Reflec. Power: 0.0W
0 100 200 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
VSWR: 1.00 Main Menu Vector NDB HP
0 1 2 Changeover Control
Main Menu Status Power Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2
Settings Apr 24 2007
Peripherals 15:17:38
RCMS Settings Nautel
Select Meters

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Currently Active Faults:
Command RF OFF 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Changeover Control
Main side: [ A ]
Monitor mode: [BYPASS]

Reset Meters

Main Menu Modify Back

(a) From the meter screen, press Status, if

displayed. A list of current faults is (a) Set the main side to either A or B.
displayed. If Status is not displayed, no
faults are being recognized. (b) Set the monitor mode to either BYPASS
or NORMAL. Bypass mode inhibits
automatic changeover from the main side
NOTE to the standby side.
Use the Events Log (see paragraph 3.6.5) to
view alarm history.
3.6.5 Viewing Events Log
The most recent 256 transmitter events
(b) If necessary, press f or g to scroll
(alarms, operational changes, etc.) are stored
through the faults. in memory. View the events log as follows:
(c) Press Reset to attempt to clear the 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
alarm. Main Menu Vector NDB HP
Changeover Control
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2
(d) Press Meters to return to the meters Settings Apr 24 2007
screen. Peripherals 15:17:38
RCMS Settings Nautel
Select Meters
3.6.4 Changeover Control
The transmitter has two fully redundant
exciter and RF power paths (sides A and B).
The active side and the monitor mode can be 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
08Apr80 12:33:15 PS Module A1 Missing
controlled using the diagnostic display. View 08Apr80 12:33:13 Return to normal
and, if necessary, edit the changeover control 08Apr80 12:33:13 Command Exciter B
settings as follows: 08Apr80 12:33:13 Low AC Voltage
08Apr80 12:33:02 Power Up
08Apr80 12:32:56 Mod. Protection
Select 000 Alarms Only Back

Page 3-22 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Table 3-10: Events Log Displays – Non-Alarm Events
NON-ALARM EVENTS (as displayed) DESCRIPTION
Return to normal Transmitter alarms have cleared.
Power up Transmitter has completed power up.

(a) From the main menu, highlight Events

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Log (using f and g) and press Select. Settings
The center soft-key permits viewing the Set Real Time Clock
Events Log in two different modes – All Monitor Settings
Meter Settings
Events or Alarms Only. For either Power Source Select
mode, a list of events is displayed, Configure Sonalert
sorted chronologically, with a root-cause Main Menu Select Back

description of the event.

NOTE 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Refer to Table 3-10 for a list of non-alarm Set Real Time Clock
events that can be displayed on the Events Use up / down keys to select a value to
change. Press MODIFY to make changes.
Log and a brief description of each. A list of SET: Save changes to clock BACK: done
alarm events is available in Table 5-1. Time Day Date
14:30:29 Wed 08/Apr/80
Set Modify Back
(b) Press f or g to scroll through the
events.
NOTE
(c) Press Select ### on a highlighted event The real-time clock does not automatically
to display the transmitter status when update for Daylight Savings Time (DST).
the highlighted event occurred. Use the
Next event button to check the status of 3.6.7 Setting RF Monitor Limits
subsequent numbered events. High and low power thresholds, low
modulation threshold and loss of keying
can be set to ensure the transmitter is
NOTE operating within acceptable limits. If the RF
The 3-digit number shown in the Select carrier is outside these limits for a pre-
### display is the number allocated to the defined delay period, the transmitter
highlighted event. Event 000 is the most
initiates a changeover to the standby side
recent occurrence.
(in normal operation) or a shutdown (in
bypass mode). Set the transmitter’s RF
(d) To clear the history stored in the
monitor limits as follows:
events log, press the f and g buttons
simultaneously.
NOTE
International Civil Aviation Organization
(e) Press Back to return to the main menu.
(ICAO) standards dictate the transmitter be
turned off or a warning alarm be generated
3.6.6 Setting Real Time Clock
when the RF output decreases by 3.0 dB
Set the real-time clock as follows:
or increases by 2.0 dB from the intended
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass carrier level. The user can alter the monitor
Main Menu Vector NDB HP
Changeover Control settings provided these criteria are still met.
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2
Settings Apr 24 2007
Peripherals 15:17:38
RCMS Settings Nautel
Select Meters

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-23

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass x The monitor shutdown can be set (using
Main Menu Vector NDB HP f and g) for ENABLED or DISABLED.
Changeover Control
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2
Settings Apr 24 2007 (d) Press Back, highlight Power
Peripherals 15:17:38 Thresholds and press Select. The
RCMS Settings Nautel
Select Meters
following message is displayed. Press
Continue to proceed.

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Settings
Set Real Time Clock Before proceeding, make sure that you
Monitor Settings have set the power level to your
Meter Settings Desired operating conditions.
Power Source Select
Configure Sonalert Continue Back
Main Menu Select Back

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Power Thresholds A B
Monitor Power Reading: 0 0
(a) From the main menu, highlight Settings Low Power Limit: -2.99 dB 0 0
High Power Limit: 1.99 dB 0 0
and press Select. Highlight Monitor
Settings and press Select. Compute New
Thresholds Modify Back

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Monitor Settings NOTE
Monitor Timeout As the warning message indicates, ensure
Power Thresholds that the transmitter is operating at the desired
Automatic Reset
Mod % Thresholds power level before computing the new
thresholds. If the power level of the
Main Menu Select Back transmitter changes after computing the
thresholds, re-establish the thresholds.

(e) Use f and g to highlight the desired

(b) Highlight Monitor Timeout and press monitor timeout field and press Modify:
Select. See step (d) for Power
Thresholds x The low limit is factory set for 3.00 dB.
Adjust using f and g.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Monitor Timeout
Monitor Timeout Period:
x The high limit is factory set for 2.00 dB.
20 seconds Adjust using f and g.
Monitor Shutdown:
DISABLED
(f) Press Back, highlight Automatic Reset
Main Menu Modify Back and press Select.

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

(c) Use f and g to highlight the desired Automatic Reset
monitor timeout field and press Modify: Fault 1 ENABLED (continue) Delay 00:40
Fault 2 ENABLED (repeat) Delay 00:20
Fault 3 DISABLED
x The monitor timeout period can be set Fault 4 DISABLED
(using f and g) between 4 and 82 s Fault 5 DISABLED
(factory set for 20 s). Main Menu Modify Back

Page 3-24 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 (g) Use f and g to highlight the desired 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
-Before proceeding, make sure that you
Fault 1 -5 field and press Modify. Set the have set the ident tone to the minimum
Automatic Reset schedule as follows: acceptable modulation depth with PTT
inactive, and again with PTT active.
-If this is a dual system, ensure tone
NOTE has been set correctly on both sides.
The Automatic Reset allows the user to Continue Back
define a reset schedule for the transmitter
after a shutdown condition. The schedule can Side A Side B
have up to five sequential levels, each with
their own user definable delay period (up to 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
24 hours) and subsequent instruction. Mod % Thresholds
Minimum Allowable Tone Modulation Depth:
...PTT Inactive: 164 153
x ENABLED (continue): attempts a reset ...PTT Active: 1023 1023
the denoted delay time after a shutdown 63.8 63.8
and then, if no reset occurs, continues to Compute New Rf Mon: CURR 35.4 35.4
Thresholds Toggle Back
the next item in the Fault schedule.

x ENABLED (repeat): attempt a reset the NOTE

denoted delay time after a shutdown and As the warning message indicates, ensure
continues attempting (as necessary) after that the transmitter is operating at the
each delay time. All subsequent items in minimum allowable modulation depth before
the Fault schedule default to DISABLED. computing the thresholds. If the transmitter is
to operate in both PTT and Normal modes,
x ENABLED (halt): attempts a reset the set up both thresholds, otherwise, set up only
denoted delay time after a shutdown and the applicable threshold.
then, if no reset occurs, stops attempting.
All subsequent items in the Fault (i) The screen shows the minimum
schedule default to DISABLED. allowable modulation for PTT Inactive
(no voice) and PTT Active (voice).
x DISABLED: no attempt to reset.
x The left column has side A values and
x Waits the Fault 1 delay period (40 min) the right column has side B values.

x Attempts to reset transmitter. If x The first two values in each column are
successful, Automatic Reset schedule internal tone generator reference values.
will begin on Fault 1 next shutdown. If
unsuccessful, reset sequence continues x The third and fourth values are the
to Fault 2 item. modulation depth (in %) for PTT Inactive
and PTT Active respectively.
x Waits the Fault 2 delay period (20 min)
x Press Toggle to switch between RF
x Attempts to reset transmitter. If Mon: CURR and Rf Mon: VOLT, if
successful, Automatic Reset schedule desired.
will begin on Fault 1 next shutdown. If
unsuccessful, repeats Fault 2 item. (j) Press Compute New Thresholds to
establish new monitor modulation %
(h) Press Back, highlight Mod% Thresholds thresholds.
and press Select. The following message
is displayed. Press Continue to proceed. (k) If a modification is made, a screen
appears which prompts you to save
changes to EEPROM. Select Yes or No.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-25

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.6.8 Meter Settings 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Determine the parameter to be displayed on Meter Settings
Change Meter Groups
the front panel analog meter or the diagnostic Select Analog Meter
display’s meters screen as follows: Calib. Analog Meter

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Settings Main Menu Select Back
Set Real Time Clock
Monitor Settings
Meter Settings
Power Source Select 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Configure Sonalert Forward Power: 0W
Main Menu Select Back 0 600 1200
Reflec. Power: 0.0W
0 100 200
VSWR: 1.00
0 1 2
(a) From the main menu, highlight Settings Save Backup Modify Back
(using f and g) and press Select.
Highlight Meter Settings and press (a) Use f and g to select the parameter to
Select. Use f and g to highlight be replaced and press Modify. Use f
Change Meter Groups, Select Analog and g to select the desired parameter to
Meter or Calib. Analog Meter and press be monitored in its place. Press Done to
Select. Refer to the appropriate activate the change. Press Back.
paragraph (3.6.8.1 through 3.6.8.3 for
further details. (b) A message appears to save changes to
the EEPROM. Press Yes or No.
3.6.8.1 Changing Meter Groups
The currently displayed meters on the 3.6.8.2 Selecting Analog Meter
diagnostic display’s meters screen can be Select the parameter to be displayed on the
changed to display any three of the available front panel analog meter as follows:
meters:
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Forward Power +5 V P/S Meter Settings
Change Meter Groups
Reflected Power -15 V P/S Select Analog Meter
Modulation % PDM A or B Calib. Analog Meter
Modulation % A B+ Volts P/S A or B
Modulation % B PA Volts P/S A or B Main Menu Select Back
VSWR Dc Current P/S A or B
Ac Voltage Temperature P/S A or B Selected
RF Current Fan 1 Speed P/S A or B Parameter
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Antenna Current Fan 2 Speed P/S A or B Select Analog Meter
Temperature Battery Voltage Scale 0-4000
ATU Temperature Battery Current PDM B: 0.00% (x)
PDM A: 0.00% ( )
+24 V P/S Charger Current DC Curr B: 0.00A ( )
+15 V P/S DC Curr B: 0.00A ( )
Choose Scale Select Back

NOTE
Modulation % A refers to the modulation read
by monitor board A and Modulation % B
refers to modulation read by monitor board B. (a) Use f or g to select the desired meter
Modulation % refers to the active monitor parameter and press Select. Press
board. Choose Scale to select from various
scale options to view the parameter on
Set up the displayed parameters as follows: the front panel analog meter.

Page 3-26 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 (b) Press Back to return to the Meter 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Settings screen. A message appears to Power Source Select
Low AC Volts : No DC I/F Instld:No
confirm saving changes to the EEPROM. Active Power Source: AC
Press Yes or No. DC Disconnect Level: 126
DC Reconnect Level : 132
Requested Power Source:BOTH
3.6.8.3 Calibrating Analog Meter Main Menu Modify Back
Calibrate the analog meter as follows:
(a) From the main menu, highlight Settings
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Meter Settings (using f and g) and press Select.
Change Meter Groups Highlight Power Source Select and
Select Analog Meter
Calib. Analog Meter press Select.

(b) The parameters than can be modified

Main Menu Select Back
(press Modify and use f or g) are:

x DC Disconnect Level (DC power source

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass operation): if the dc power source is
below this voltage, the transmitter will
Press the up/down keys to adjust the discontinue operation
analog meter. The reading on the upper
scale should read 1k.
(Midscale calibration constant:224) x DC Reconnect Level (DC power source
Reset Done Cancel operation): when the dc power source
recovers to this voltage, the transmitter
(a) When the analog meter is calibrated, will attempt to restore operation.
press Done.
x Requested Power Source: AC, DC,
3.6.9 Selecting Power Source BOTH (if both ac and dc power sources
Select the transmitter’s power source and are installed) or NONE.
view power source related parameters as
follows: (c) Press Done to activate. A message
appears to confirm saving changes to the
EEPROM. Press Yes or No.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Main Menu Vector NDB HP
Changeover Control (d) The remaining parameters are for
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2 monitoring only.
Settings Apr 24 2007
Peripherals 15:17:38
RCMS Settings Nautel x Low AC Volts: Yes or No (indicates if the
Select Meters ac voltage dropped below the low ac
threshold).

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass x DC I/F Instld: Yes or No (indicates if dc

Settings distribution assembly A7 is installed).
Set Real Time Clock
Monitor Settings
Meter Settings x Active Power Source: indicates the power
Power Source Select source configuration for the transmitter
Configure Sonalert
(AC, DC, BOTH or NONE)
Main Menu Select Back

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-27

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.6.10 Configuring the Sonalert 3.6.11 Setting a Timed Shutdown
Configure the status of the audible alarm Set a timed shutdown as follows:
(sonalert) for all transmitter alarms as follows:
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass Main Menu
Vector NDB
Main Menu Vector NDB HP Changeover Control
rev 1. 0. 4. 1
Changeover Control Events Log
Jul 27 2007
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2 Settings
13:52:45
Peripherals
Settings Apr 24 2007 Nautel
RCMS Settings
Peripherals 15:17:38
Nautel Select Meters
RCMS Settings
Select Meters

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass Settings
Settings Meter Settings
Power Source Select
Set Real Time Clock
Configure Sonalert
Monitor Settings
Timed Shutdown
Meter Settings
Factory Settings
Power Source Select
Main Menu Select Back
Configure Sonalert
Main Menu Select Back
(a) From the main menu, highlight Settings
and press Select. Highlight Timed
Shutdown and press Select.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Alarm Signal SonAlert SiteCtrl
PDM Latch B OFF OFF 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
PDM Latch A OFF OFF Timed Shutdown
High RF Curr OFF OFF Timed Shutdown [DISABLED ]
Ref Pwr Shutb OFF OFF Interval [00:05 ]
Low AC Volts OFF OFF Auto Assert [Monitor Point 1 ]
Timer State:
Toggle Modify Back
Stopped 00:05:00
Main Menu Toggle Back
(a) From the main menu, highlight Settings
(using f and g) and press Select. (b) Highlight Timed Shutdown, Interval or
Highlight Configure Sonalert and press Auto Assert, noting:
Select.
x For Timed Shutdown, press Toggle to
(b) A list of transmitter alarms and their change between ENABLED and
current SonAlert (audible) and Site Ctrl DISABLED. When Timed Shutdown is
(remote outputs) status is displayed. ENABLED, the transmitter will shut down
the Interval period (in hours:minutes)
x To configure an alarm for the sonalert, after RF On is asserted.
use f and g to select the desired alarm;
press Toggle to change the status to ON. x For Interval, press Modify to enable
editing of the interval time. Use f and g
x Press Modify to configure an alarm for to change the interval between 5 minutes
use with site interface PWB A2A4 (if and 24 hours (in 5 minute increments).
installed). Use f and g to select the Press Done to store the change.
desired alarm and press Toggle to
change the status from OFF to the
appropriate remote control output (1
through 16).

Page 3-28 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 x For Auto Assert, press Modify to enable (a) From the main menu, highlight Settings
editing of the asserting monitor point. Use (using f and g) and press Select.
f and g to change the monitor point Highlight Factory Settings and press the
between 1 and 40 (or Disabled). Press f and left soft-key simultaneously.
Done to store the change. Monitor points
can only enable the timed shutdown
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
timer. Set Timed Shutdown to
DISABLED when using Auto Assert. Warning: Modifying these
settings can affect your
transmitter operation.
3.6.12 Changing Factory Calibrated Do you wish to continue?
Settings
Certain parameters, calibrated during factory Yes No
testing, can be changed, in local control only,
if an out-of-tolerance condition occurs. Press Yes to display the following options:

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass Factory Settings
Main Menu Vector NDB HP Calibrate Meters
Changeover Control Set Thresholds
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2 Maximum Output Gain
Settings Apr 24 2007 Use Factory Settings
Peripherals 15:17:38
RCMS Settings Nautel Main Menu Select Back
Select Meters

(b) Press f or g to scroll through the

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Settings options and press Select to enter the
Monitor Settings appropriate sub-menu (see appropriate
Meter Settings paragraph 3.6.12.1 through 3.6.12.4):
Power Source Select
Configure Sonalert
Factory Settings
Main Menu Select Back

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-29

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.6.12.1 CALIBRATING DIAGNOSTIC 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
DISPLAY METERS Set Thresholds
Re-align an out-of-tolerance meter reading for Refl. Power Shutback: 38
a displayed parameter as follows:

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass Main Menu Modify Back

Calibrate Meters

PDM B: 0.00 CAUTION

0 50 100
Protection threshold levels are factory set
and do not normally require adjustment.
Main Menu Modify Back Contact Nautel prior to attempting to alter
these settings. Failure to comply could result
NOTE in equipment damage.
All meter readings displayed on the meters
screen can be adjusted. It is imperative that (a) Press f or g until the desired threshold
reliable, calibrated test equipment be used and its current value is displayed. The
to verify the actual value of the out-of- following thresholds may be displayed
tolerance parameter. and edited:

(a) Press f or g until the desired out-of- x Refl. Power Shutback

tolerance parameter and its current x Low AC Voltage
metered level is displayed. x RF Current
x Audio
(b) To calibrate a meter, press Modify and x LCD Contrast
then f or g to adjust the level of the out- x Slowback Pwr (Per Block)
of-tolerance parameter. When complete, x Max. PS Temperature (°C)
press Done. x Max. ATU Temperature (°C)
x Minimum Logged Cutback
(c) Continue calibration of other metered
parameters or return to previous menu by (b) To edit a threshold value, press Modify
pressing Back. A message prompt and then f or g to adjust the value.
appears to confirm saving all When complete, press Done. Press
modifications to the EEPROM. Press Yes Reset to restore the value to its pre-
or No. modified setting.

3.6.12.2 SETTING PROTECTION NOTE

THRESHOLD LEVELS The Minimum Logged Cutback threshold
Adjustments can be made to the critical can be set between 1 (least severe) and 18
transmitter shutback thresholds, such as RF (most severe). Only cutback occurrences of
current, low ac voltage, and high reflected the set value and higher (more severe) will
power cutback levels. Less critical settings, be logged.
such as diagnostic display contrast and
speaker volume (audio) can also be adjusted. (c) When complete, return to previous menu
Set these thresholds as follows: by pressing Back. A prompt appears to
confirm saving modifications to the
EEPROM. Press Yes or No.

Page 3-30 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 3.6.12.3 SETTING MAXIMUM OUTPUT 3.6.12.4 USING FACTORY SETTINGS
LIMITATIONS The functions described in paragraphs
The maximum allowable output gain can be 3.6.12.1 through 3.6.12.3 can be restored to
adjusted in terms of carrier reference. factory settings as follows:
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Maximum Output Gain
Set Duty Cycle: 0.00 Do you want to restore Factory Defaults?
Set Forward Power: 0 All current settings will be lost.
Maximum Carrier Reference: 154
PDM A: 7.97% Carr. Ref: 8
B+ Volt A: 75.0V PA Volt A: 6.4V
Main Menu Modify Back
Yes No

NOTE (a) Pressing Yes will restore all setup and

The Set Duty Cycle and Set Forward calibration values and thresholds to
Power values represent actual transmitter factory settings. All other saved
levels. The Maximum Carrier Reference information, including changes to presets,
represents the maximum carrier reference is also restored to factory settings.
value and can be used to limit output power.
3.6.13 Viewing and Setting
The bottom two rows display current levels Peripherals
for the active side (A or B). View and set parameters related to auxiliary
items, such as the keyer, the ATU or the
CAUTION transmitter’s inactive (standby) side, as
Do not adjust the Maximum Carrier follows:
Reference to a value that causes the
transmitter to exceed its rated power level.
Failure to observe this may void the 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Main Menu Vector NDB HP
equipment warranty. Changeover Control
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2
Settings Apr 24 2007
(a) Press f or g until the desired parameter Peripherals 15:17:38
(Set Duty Cycle and Set Forward RCMS Settings Nautel
Power are grouped together) is Select Meters
displayed.

(b) To edit a parameter, press Modify and (a) From the main menu, highlight
then f or g to adjust the value. If the Peripherals (using f and g) and press
Set Duty Cycle and Set Forward Power Select.
group is selected to Modify, use the Next
button to toggle between the two items.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Peripherals
(c) When complete, press Done. Press Keyer Settings
Power Modules
Reset to restore the value to its pre-
ATU Controls
modified setting. Test Standby Side
Select Peripherals
(d) When complete, return to previous menu Main Menu Select Back
by pressing Back. A prompt appears to
confirm saving modifications to the
EEPROM. Press Yes or No. (b) Press f or g to scroll through the
options and press Select to enter the
appropriate sub-menu (see 3.6.13.1
through 3.6.13.6).

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-31

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
x Keyer Settings (para. 3.6.13.1) x The Side B Scaling factor is used to
x Power Modules (para. 3.6.13.2) scale pot values for side B to allow for an
x ATU Controls (para. 3.6.13.3) adjustment so the modulation depth on
x Test Standby Side (para. 3.6.13.4) side B can be calibrated to match side A.
x Select Peripherals (para. 3.6.13.5)
x Module Check (para. 3.6.13.6) x There are two values displayed for each
Pot. The left-hand value is for side A.
3.6.13.1 SETTING THE KEYER The right-hand value is for side B. The
Set up the keyer as follows: side B Pot value should be the side A
Pot value multiplied by the Side B
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass Scaling factor.
Keyer Settings
Audio Levels
Keyer Modulation
x If a Pot value (side A or B) is adjusted,
Keyer Sequence the other side’s value will automatically
Standby Code 1 change according to the Side B Scaling
Standby Code 2
factor.
Main Menu Select Back

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Audio Levels Keyer Modulation
Mod %: 0.0% Modulation [ON ]
Side B Scaling: 2.000 Keyer [OFF ]
Keying Pot: 120 240 Tone Generator [ON ]
Voice Pot: 128 255 Tone Frequency [1020 Hz]
PTT Keying Pot: 128 255
Main Menu Modify Back Main Menu Toggle Back

SIDE A SIDE B (b) Keyer Modulation: Select the desired

parameter, using f or g. Press Toggle
to change the status or value and then
(a) Audio Levels: Select the desired
press Back:
parameter, using f or g. To edit, press
Modify and then use f or g to adjust 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
the Side B Scaling factor, Keying Pot Frame Sequence Press up/down
MK MK MK MK MK MK MK MK keys to select a
(for tone modulation level in beacon
field to change
mode), PTT Keying Pot (for tone Keyed String: TEST Press Modify to
modulation level in PTT, or press-to-talk Frame Format: TRANS CAN make changes
Frame Timing: 20.0 sec
mode) or Voice Pot (for voice modulation
Main Menu Modify Back
level in PTT mode) value. Press Done
and Back when complete.
x Modulation, Keyer and Tone Generator
can be set to ON or OFF.
NOTE
The Side B Scaling factor is factory set and
x Tone Frequency can be set to 400 Hz or
should not require user adjustment. If the
1020 Hz.
modulation depth on side B does not match
the modulation depth on side A, adjust the
(a) Keyer Sequence: Select the desired
Side B Scaling factor up or down until they
parameter, Frame Sequence, Keyed
agree.
String, Frame Format or Frame Timing,
using f or g. Press Modify and follow
After adjusting the Side B Scaling factor,
the instructions on the right-hand side of
adjust a Pot value (press f and g) to
the GUI display.
enable the new scaling factor.

Page 3-32 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 Frame Sequence
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass (d) Standby Codes 1 and 2: Press
Frame Sequence Legend: Select to enable [X] or disable [ ] the
MK MK MK MK MK MK MK MK MK: All Marks
SP: All Spaces standby code 1 or 2.
Keyed String: TEST AL: Alternating
Frame Format: NAV CAN Marks/Spaces 12:43:16 Power: 0W Site
Side A Bypass
Frame Timing: 20.0 sec KY: Keyed String
Reset Next Cancel Standby Code 2
[ X ] Enable Standby Code 2
Keyed String
Alternates between the standard keyed
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass frame and the Standby Code 1 frame.
Frame Sequence Press up/down
MK MK MK MK MK MK MK MK keys to change Main Menu View
Select
Details Back
the selected
Keyed String: TEST letter. Press
Frame Format: NAV CAN Next to go on to 3.6.13.2 VIEWING POWER MODULE
Frame Timing: 20.0 sec the next letter STATUS
Reset Next Cancel
Configure the transmitter’s software for the
Frame Format number of power blocks and view the status
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass of individual power modules as follows:
Frame Sequence Press up/down
MK MK MK MK MK MK MK MK keys to select a X = installed
frame format to
Keyed String: TEST use. Press Done 12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass
Power Module
Frame Format: NAV CAN to confirm your
Number of Power block expected: [3]
Frame Timing: 20.0 sec selection Block # 1 2 3 4
Reset Done Cancel Side: A OK [X] [X] [X] [ ]
(set to either NAV CAN or ICAO) B OK [X] [X] [X] [ ]

Main Menu View Details Back

- ICAO: International Civil Aviation
Organization
(a) Press f or g until the desired parameter
- NAV CAN: uses a 10 s frame and 0.125 is highlighted.
ms bits to key out 3 symbols.
x If the Number of Power block expected
value is highlighted, the Modify option is
Frame Timing displayed. Press Modify and use f or g
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass to select between 1 and 4. Press Done
Frame Sequence Press up/down when complete.
MK MK MK MK MK MK MK MK keys to change
the duration of
Keyed String: TEST each frame. x If one of the eight power module fields
Frame Format: NAV CAN Press Done to (Block # 1 through 4, Side A and B) is
Frame Timing: 20.0 sec confirm changes. highlighted, the View Details option is
Reset Done Cancel
displayed. Press View Details to view
(set between 4.0 s and 20.0 s) the following RF power module details:

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass PA = Side A; Bloc 1 = Block 1

Standby Code 1
[ X ] Enable Standby Code 1 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Detailed Status PA Bloc 1
B+ Setting : 150 Inhibited : Yes
Inserts additional spaces between
Temperature: -50 B+ Voltage : 0.0
the last character and the trailing Dc Current : 0.10 PA Voltage : 0.0
marks in each keyed frame. Fan 1 Tach : 1 Fan 2 Tach : 0
Main Menu Select Back PDM Inhib : No PA Alarm : No
Main Menu Back

Press Back to return to the previous menu.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-33

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.6.13.3 ATU CONTROLS (c) In the coil control screen shown below,
If a Nautel antenna tuning unit (ATU) is being use f and g to select the desired coil to
used, view and edit its control parameters as control - Resistive Coil or Inductive
follows: Coil. Press Continue.

NOTE
12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass
A serial interface allows communication ATU Control Antenna Curr.: 0.0A
between the transmitter and the ATU. This Dec L N H Inc Auto-Tuning
interface connects to the transmitter via the R  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
INTERNAL RS-485 connector (25-pin D-sub) L  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
Coil Control: Resistive Coil
on the rear of the exciter/control assembly. UP/Down Keys: Select a coil to configure
Main Menu Continue Back
(a) The screen below appears if the ATU is
in local mode of operation and auto-
tuning is active and is tuned. This screen 12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass
allows viewing of ATU status only. No ATU Control Antenna Curr.: 0.0A
adjustments are possible while the ATU Dec L N H Inc Auto-Tuning
R  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
is in local mode. L  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
Coil Control: Resistive Coil
What would you like to do:
Increase/Decrease Arrows Auto Tuning Slew Servo Back
(Affected arrow is highlighted during
OR
auto or manual tuning)

12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass (d) If Auto Tuning is selected, the following
ATU Control Antenna Curr.: 0.0A screen appears which allows the selected
Dec L N H Inc Auto-Tuning coil to be auto tuned (active) or inhibited.
R  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
Use f and g to highlight Active or
L  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
ATU is in LOCAL Mode Inhibited, then press Done to select.
Back
12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass
Resistive (R) and Auto-Tuning Status ATU Control Antenna Curr.: 0.0A
Inductive (L) (Active or Inhibited) Dec L N H Inc Auto-Tuning
R  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
Tuning Status Line L  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
Coil Control: Resistive Coil
Up/Down Keys: (De)Activate Auto Tuning
(b) If the ATU is set to the remote mode of Done
operation, the screen is as shown below.
This screen allows ATU tuning to be (e) If Slew Servo is selected, the following
controlled from the transmitter GUI. screen appears which allows the selected
Press Coil Control. coil to be manually tuned. Use f and g
to slew the coil high or low. Press Done
12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass when complete.
ATU Control Antenna Curr.: 0.0A
Dec L N H Inc Auto-Tuning
R  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive 12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass
ATU Control Antenna Curr.: 0.0A
L  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
ATU is in REMOTE Mode Dec L N H Inc Auto-Tuning
Press Coil Control to modify ATU settings R  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
Main Menu Coil Control Back L  [ ] [x] [ ] ΠActive
Coil Control: Resistive Coil:Slew Servo
Up/Down Keys: Slew coil High/Low
Done

Page 3-34 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 3.6.13.4 TESTING THE STANDBY SIDE x To hear the sonalert buzzer for a fault
Test the operation of the transmitter’s defined in the sonalert setup menu,
inactive (standby) side as follows: select SonAlert.

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass x To hear the transmitter output, select

Test Standby Side
Turn Standby Side Off Speaker.
Test Power Supply
Test Modulators x To enable the GUI to display Audio
Test RF Drive
Run All Tests Limit alarm occurrences, select
Main Menu Select Back Overmod Alarm.

(b) Return to previous menu by pressing

Back or press Main Menu.
(a) Use f and g to highlight the desired
test. Press Select to activate. 3.6.13.6 CHECKING MODULES:
Check the software revision of various
(b) If you select a test, the display will modules that contain microcontrollers as
initially indicate Running. When the follows:
test is complete, a pass (OK) or fail
indication is displayed. If the item 12:43:16 Power: 0W Site A Bypass
Module Check
under test fails, a root cause message 7
(e.g., PS Ovr Cur) is displayed. 8
9 NAPE76u rev 0. 2. 0
10 NAPE76u rev 0. 2. 0
NOTE 11
The root cause text is identical to that Main Menu Select Back
displayed in the Status menu (see 3.6.3).
(a) Use f and g to scroll through rows 1
3.6.13.5 SELECTING PERIPHERALS to 12, noting:
Configure the transmitter’s software for
peripheral equipment, such as an ATU or x Rows 1 through 8 are assigned to RF
site interface PWB as follows: power modules (maximum of four RF
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass power blocks, maximum of two sides
Select Peripherals per block).
Site Control Board [x ]
ATU [ ] Indicates
SonAlert Buzzer [ ] Selected x Rows 9 and 10 are assigned to the
Speaker [ ] Peripherals exciter/monitor generator PWBs (side
Overmod Alarm [ ]
Main Menu Select Back
A and, if applicable, side B).

x Row 11 is assigned to the associated

ATUs control/monitor PWB.
(a) Use f and g to highlight the desired
peripheral. Press Select to activate. x Row 12 is assigned to the site control
PWB, if installed.
x If the site interface PWB (A2A4) is
installed, select Site Control Board. NOTE
If text is not displayed for a particular row,
x If a Nautel ATU is used and a serial the associated module or PWB is not
interface is connected to the installed.
INTERNAL RS-485 connector on the
rear of the exciter/control assembly,
select ATU.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-35

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.6.14 Remote Control Monitor (a) Use f and g to highlight the desired
System Settings control point (1 through 16). Press
If the NDB site interface PWB (A2A4) is Toggle to change the logic level (0 or
installed, configure the active logic states of 1) of the Set Value. The logic level
the control and monitor points as follows: determines the active state for the
control point’s remote input.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Main Menu Vector NDB HP NOTE
Changeover Control
Events Log rev 1. 0. 1. 2
Control points 1 through 16 correspond to
Settings Apr 24 2007 inputs connected to CONTROL POINT 1
Peripherals 15:17:38 through 16 on TB3 of the remote control/
RCMS Settings Nautel
monitor interface PWB.
Select Meters

(b) Return to previous menu by pressing

Back.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
RCMS Settings
Control Points 3.6.14.2 SETTING MONITOR POINTS
Monitor Points Set the site interface PWB’s monitor points
Serial Setting as follows:
Automatic Reporting

Main Menu Select Back 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Monitor Points Default Current
Monitor Point 1 0 0
(a) From the main menu, highlight RCMS Monitor Point 2 0 0
Settings and press Select. Monitor Point 3 0 0
Monitor Point 4 0 0
Monitor Point 5 0 0
Set Current Toggle Back
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Control Points Set Value
Control Point 1 0 (a) Use f and g to highlight the desired
Control Point 2 0
Control Point 3 0 monitor point (1 through 16). Press
Control Point 4 0 Toggle to change the logic level (0 or
Control Point 5 0
1) of the Default value. The logic level
Toggle Back
determines the active (for status
outputs) or normal (for alarm outputs)
(b) Set the transmitter to Local mode. state for the monitor point’s remote
output.
(c) Press f or g to scroll through the
options and press Select to enter the NOTE
appropriate sub-menu (see paragraphs Monitor points 1 through 16 correspond to
3.6.14.1 through 3.6.14.3). outputs connected to MONITOR POINT 1
through 16 on TB1 and TB2 of the site
x Control Points (see 3.6.14.1) interface PWB.
x Monitor Points (see 3.6.14.2)
x Serial Settings (see 3.6.14.3) (b) The values in the Current column
x Automatic Reporting (see 3.6.14.4) represent the existing state of the
monitor point. Press Set Current to
3.6.14.1 SETTING CONTROL POINTS set the Current values to match the
Set the site interface PWBs control points Default values.
as follows:
(c) Return to previous menu by pressing
Back.

Page 3-36 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
 3.6.14.3 SERIAL SETTINGS x Press Toggle to set Modem Line to
Set up the serial connection as follows: DIAL UP or LEASED. The Dial-up
number option disappears when
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Serial Settings LEASED is selected.
Tx Address ABCD
[DIRECT ]
Connection Mode
x Press f, g and Next to set the
Passkey and the Dial-up Number.

Main Menu Modify Back (b) Return to the previous menu by

pressing Back.
(a) Use f and g to highlight the desired
serial setting. Press Modify or Toggle 3.6.14.4 AUTOMATIC REPORTING
to change the setting. Press Next or Configure the serial connection to
Done when complete. automatically report transmitter alarms
(without needing to poll the status) as
x To modify Tx Address, use f and g. follows:

x Press Toggle to set Connection Mode 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Fault Automatic Reporting
to DIRECT or MODEM. When PDM Latch B OFF
MODEM is selected, the following PDM Latch A OFF
screen appears, which enables three High RF Current OFF
SWR Shutback OFF
further settings: Low AC Volts OFF
Main Menu Select Back

12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass

Serial Settings (a) A list of transmitter alarms and their
Tx Address ABCD
[MODEM ]
current Automatic Reporting status is
Connection Mode
Modem Line [DIAL UP] displayed.
Passkey 0000
Dial-up Number x To configure an alarm for automatic
Main Menu Toggle Back
reporting, use f and g to select the
desired alarm and press Select to
change the status to ON.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 3-37

Section 3 Operating Instructions Issue 2.0
3.6.15 Viewing Power Related (a) From the meter screen, press Power.
Parameters and Setting ATU The current forward power, reflected
Current Feedback power, carrier reference, VSWR,
View the transmitter’s power menu and, if antenna current, B+ voltage (for the
necessary, set the status of the ATU active side’s power supply) and dc
current feedback circuit as follows: current (for the active side’s power
supply).
NOTE
The ATU current feedback circuit attempts (b) To edit the Fwd. Power or ATU
to regulate the antenna current over a Current Feedback field, press Modify
range of RF output power. The two ATU and then use f and g to edit:
options in the power menu are only
available when the transmitter is attached x Fwd. Power changes in 1 W steps
(using a RS485 serial link) to the ATU-HP
or ATU-LP. x ATU Current Feedback toggles
between ON and OFF.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Forward Power: 0W (c) Press Done when complete.
0 600 1200
Reflec. Power: 0.0W
0 100 200 NOTE
VSWR: 1.00 The transmitter regulates the antenna
0 1 2
current to the ATU Current Setpoint value
Main Menu Status Power
displayed on the GUI. Ensure the
transmitter’s RF output is set to the desired
level before setting the ATU Current
Feedback field to ON.
12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Fwd. Power : 108W Rfld.Power: 0.0W
Carr. Ref: 59 VSWR: 1.00
Ant. Curr. : 1.8A B+ Volt A: 75.2V
DC Curr A: 0.70A
ATU Current Feedback: OFF
ATU Current Setpoint: 1.8
Main Menu Modify Back

Page 3-38 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 3 Operating Instructions
Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Section 4 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1 INTRODUCTION 4.3 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
This section contains step-by-step To verify the transmitter circuits are within
functional test procedures using integral factory specifications, complete the tests in
meters and precision test/monitoring this section. In cases where a routine
equipment. The test procedures contain adjustment will correct an out-of-tolerance
routine adjustment instructions to bring the condition, the adjustment procedure is
parameter being tested within defined included.
limits, where appropriate.
NOTE
NOTE If an in-tolerance condition cannot be
Nautel recommends all instructions be attained with the specified routine
followed in the order presented, particularly adjustment, discontinue testing until the
by personnel who are not familiar with cause of the out-of-tolerance condition is
detailed circuit theory and may not realize corrected.
the impact a specific adjustment can have
on other steps. These adjustments should 4.3.1 General
be performed during initial turn-on and after Functional tests should be performed as a
major repairs or a frequency change. routine part of scheduled maintenance
checks, and as the first step in
4.2 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS troubleshooting procedures. The results
The transmitter contains protection circuits should be recorded for comparison with
that monitor critical parameters. When the past and future test results.
defined limits of any of these parameters
are exceeded, one of the operational lamps 4.3.1.1 The functional test procedures are
on the exciter panel’s system diagram will provided in a step-by-step format. This
turn red. If the alarm condition could result method of presentation will permit a person
in excessive power amplifier stress current, who is unfamiliar with the transmitter to
the control voltage applied to the power perform the functional tests in a logical
amplifiers will effectively be reduced or sequence. The procedures should be
turned off until the out-of-tolerance completed in sequence, as each procedure
condition no longer exists. Maintainers establishes switch settings and contains
should read and fully understand the prerequisites for subsequent procedures.
Section 3 - Operating Instructions, and in
particular the section on controls and 4.3.1.2 The following assumes the initial
indicators. turn-on procedure detailed in Section 2 has
been completed during initial installation,
NOTE and after major repairs that warrant the
The diagnostic display’s meters screen initial start-up procedure be repeated.
displays three pre-determined parameters
(e.g., forward power, total dc current, +15 V
power supply, etc.). All transmitter
parameters may be displayed on this
screen. See paragraph 3.6.8.1.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-1

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
 $ - item used only in NDB
transmitters

* - optional item, installed on dual

side transmitters only

Figure 4-1 Exciter/Control Assembly A2

Page 4-2 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
 4.3.1.3 The exciter’s PWBs may be WARNING
duplicated and connected as active (main) If there is a jumper between TB1-19 and
and reserve (standby). The exciter/control TB1-20 on the remote interface PWB,
assembly’s diagnostic display provides safety features provided by the external
selection of the active exciter (A or B). The interlocks are disabled. Implement a
following list identifies the duplicated PWBs fail-safe method to alert personnel to
and which are active for a specific this fact. Dangerous voltages will be
selection. Refer to Figure 4-1 to locate present near the RF output and the
exciter assemblies. To locate an antenna system if the transmitter is
assembly’s adjustment or test point, refer turned on under these conditions.
to the controls and indicators portion of
Section 3. (d) Close all external interlocks or connect
a jumper between TB1-19 and TB1-20
Exciter A Assemblies of the remote interface PWB.
RF Synthesizer PWB .................................. A2A5
Interphase PDM Driver PWB...................... A2A6 NOTE
LVPS Buck Converter PWB ....................... A2A7
Remote interface PWB A2A3 is located on
Exciter Monitor/Generator PWB ................. A2A8
the rear of exciter/control assembly A2. All
terminal blocks, including TB1, are
Exciter B Assemblies (optional)
RF Synthesizer PWB .................................. A2A9 accessible at the rear of the transmitter.
Interphase PDM Driver PWB.................... A2A10
LVPS Buck Converter PWB ..................... A2A11 NOTE
Exciter Monitor/Generator PWB ............... A2A12 This section makes frequent reference to
Section 3 - Operating Instructions. You
4.3.2 Test Equipment Required should be familiar with the transmitter’s
A dummy load rated for twice the operating instructions, specifically the front
maximum power capability of the panel GUI, before testing or adjusting the
transmitter, an oscilloscope and a digital transmitter’s circuits.
multimeter are required to perform the
functional test procedures. Refer to Table 4.3.4 Initial Turn-On
1-1 for recommended test equipment. Enable the ac or dc power source, turn on
the transmitter, and observe its alarm and
4.3.3 Test Prerequisites status indicators as follows:
The following steps must be completed
prior to performing any of the functional (a) Verify the requirements of paragraph
test procedures: 4.3.3 have been completed.

(a) Verify that nothing affecting the RF (b) Turn on (enable) the ac or dc power for
power stage has been changed or the transmitter. The AC IND lamp on
altered since the initial start-up each RF power module (viewed from
procedure (described in Section 2 of transmitter rear) will be on. The
this manual) was completed. presence and value of ac voltage can
also be viewed on the exciter/control
(b) Ensure the ac or dc power source is assembly’s diagnostic display. Ensure
turned off or disconnected. the transmitter’s RF power stage is
disabled by pressing the Control - RF
(c) Terminate the transmitter's RF output OFF switch.
into a suitably rated, precision 50 :,
load that is able to accurately display (c) Select local control by pressing the
the RF power being applied to it. Control - Local switch.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-3

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
 NOTE 4.3.5.3 SETTING DEFAULT MONITOR
During initial turn-on and adjustment of STATES
transmitter power, the diagnostic display’s If the optional NDB site interface PWB
meters screen should be monitored. (A2A4) is installed, see 3.6.14.1 and
3.6.14.2 to set default monitor states.
Various input parameters, such as
Forward Power, Average B+ Voltage, 4.3.5.4 ADJUSTING AUDIO LIMITER
and Total Dc Current should be displayed Adjust the audio limit threshold as follows:
while the transmitter RF output power is
being increased. (a) Adjust the remote interface PWBs
(A2A3) AUDIO LEVEL potentiometer
If the diagnostic display indicates an alarm, (R37) fully clockwise.
discontinue adjustment of the transmitter
and press the Status button to determine (b) Connect an audio signal at the desired
the nature of the fault. level (between -20 dBm and +10 dBm,
in a 600 : load) to the AUDIO INPUT
4.3.5 Standard Adjustments (+) (TB1-14) and (–) (TB1-16)
The following standard adjustments are terminals of the remote interface PWB.
described in this section. Verify them after
transmitter commissioning. (c) The system diagram’s External Alarm
LED should turn on.
4.3.5.1 Setting Sonalert Remote Control States
4.3.5.2 Setting Low Battery Threshold (d) In the Configure Sonalert menu (see
4.3.5.3 Setting Default Monitor States 3.6.10), set the Mod Protection alarm
4.3.5.4 Adjusting Audio Limiter signal to ON.
4.3.5.5 Setting Changeover Mode and RF
Monitor Thresholds (e) In the Select Peripherals menu
4.3.5.6 Verifying Exciter Changeover (3.6.13.5), select Sonalert Buzzer. The
Thresholds sonalert will sound an alarm.
4.3.5.7 Setting Mod Depth in Beacon Mode
4.3.5.8 Setting Mod Depth in Beacon and Voice (f) Adjust the AUDIO LEVEL
Mode potentiometer counter-clockwise until
4.3.5.9 Setting Standby Codes the alarm stops, noting there is a five
4.3.5.10 Setting the Keyer second delay between the adjustment
4.3.5.11 Setting the Antenna Current Level and the alarm reaction. The External
Alarm LED should also turn off.
4.3.5.1 SETTING SONALERT REMOTE
CONTROL STATES (g) Sweep the test signal’s frequency
Use the sonalert menu to allow a across the desired frequency band.
transmitter alarm to generate a change in a Adjust the AUDIO LEVEL when an
control points state. See Configuring the audible alarm occurs so that the level
Sonalert (3.6.10). is as high as possible without
generating an alarm.
4.3.5.2 SETTING LOW BATTERY
THRESHOLD (h) In the Configure Sonalert menu (see
If a dc power source (battery) is used, see 3.6.10), set the Mod Protection alarm
Selecting Power Source (3.6.9) to set the signal to OFF, if desired.
DC disconnect and reconnect levels.

Page 4-4 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
 4.3.5.5 SETTING CHANGEOVER MODE NOTE
AND RF MONITOR THRESHOLDS At this point the system has automatically
If a standby side is being used, adjust the determined to use either a current or
transmitter’s high and low RF power limits, voltage sample to control the modulation
low modulation and tone levels, and the detection and protection circuitry.
monitor delay period, as follows:
(h) Set the transmitter for desired
NOTE modulation depth in ‘beacon’ (PTT
International Civil Aviation Organization inactive) and ‘beacon and voice’ (PTT
(ICAO) standards dictate the transmitter be active) modes (see 3.6.7).
turned off or a warning alarm be generated
when the RF output decreases by at least (i) Enable changeover. Set changeover
3.0 dB or increases by at least 2.0 dB from control to normal mode (see 3.6.4).
the intended carrier level. The user can
alter the monitor settings provided these NOTE
criteria are still met. Changeover is inhibited when a VSWR of
1.4:1 or greater is present.
(a) Disable changeover. Set changeover
control to bypass mode (see 3.6.4). (j) Check each threshold to ensure that it
functions properly by adjusting the
(b) Set the transmitter to the desired RF transmitter beyond the desired limit
output level. and observing that the transmitter
reacts as expected. For detailed
(c) Set the transmitter for desired testing information see 4.3.5.6.
modulation depth in ‘beacon’ (PTT
inactive) and ‘beacon and voice’ (PTT NOTE
active) modes (see 3.6.7). If you manually decrease the modulation
depth, the transmitter will inhibit output
NOTE power when the tone level is below the
If the NDB is to be used only in ‘beacon’ or desired threshold. The Keying Gate
‘beacon and voice’ mode, you only need to Monitor Fail A or B fault will be displayed.
set up the NDB for the appropriate mode. To restore power, increase the modulation
level and reset the fault status.
(d) Calculate the desired low modulation
depth for each mode. Set the (k) When complete, restore the transmitter
transmitter to modulate at these levels. to the desired power level and press
reset to clear all alarms (see 3.6.3).
(e) In the Monitor Timeout screen (see Normal operation should resume.
3.6.7), set the monitor timeout period
(in seconds) and decide whether 4.3.5.6 VERIFYING EXCITER
shutdown will be enabled or disabled. CHANGEOVER THRESHOLDS
Verify the exciter changeover thresholds as
(f) In the Power Thresholds screen (see follows:
3.6.7), set the high and low power
limits and press Compute New (a) Set the exciter control mode to
Thresholds. NORMAL (see 3.6.4). Set Keyer
Modulation to ON (see 3.6.13.1)
(g) In the Mod % Thresholds screen (see Ensure that antenna current feedback
3.6.7), press Compute New is OFF (disabled, see 3.6.15) before
Thresholds. The thresholds should be proceeding.
updated with the desired values.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-5

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
(b) Select the exciter (A or B) that will be (h) Note the modulation level. Decrease
operational for the next year as the the Keying Pot level (see 3.6.13.1)
Main Side (see 3.6.4) and note the until 65% of modulation is reached.
forward power level on the screen. The transmitter should not transfer to
the standby side after 20 seconds.
NOTE
For clarity of description this procedure (i) Decrease the Keying Pot level. Power
uses factory default values for changeover should be inhibited when 60 r 2%
thresholds (3 dB for low RF power, 60% for modulation is reached. A changeover
low modulation) and timeout values (20 should occur 20 seconds later. Power
seconds). These thresholds and values are should still be inhibited on the standby
user adjustable. side. If not, continue to decrease the
Keying Pot until power is inhibited on
(c) From the diagnostic display, select the standby side (this should also
Main Menu / Settings / Monitor occur at 60 r 2% modulation). Press
Settings. The timeout counter should Cancel. Press Reset in the Status
read 20 sec. (default value; can be menu. The transmitter should switch
user adjusted). back to the main side and the
Changeover LED should no longer
(d) Decrease the RF power until the be on.
counter begins to count down. The RF
power should be 3 dB (default value, (j) Select Main Menu/Settings/Monitor
can be user adjusted) below the Settings/Mod % Thresholds. Press
power noted in step (b). Continue to proceed.

(e) A changeover should occur after the

Side A Side B
timeout counter value in step (c). If
not, adjust the RF power to the
original level noted in step (b). Select 12:43:16 Power: 0W Side A Bypass
Mod % Thresholds
Main Menu/Settings/Monitor Settings/ Minimum Allowable Tone Modulation Depth:
Power Thresholds. Press Continue to ...PTT Inactive: 164 153
proceed. Press Compute New ...PTT Active: 1023 1023
63.8 63.8
Thresholds to establish new power Compute New Rf Mon: CURR 35.4 35.4
thresholds. If a modification is made, Thresholds Toggle Back
a screen appears which prompts you
to save changes to EEPROM. Select The third row in the Side A column
Yes. Return to step (d). (63.8 in the example above) should
read 60 r 2%. The third row in the
(f) Increase the RF power to the desired Side B column (also 63.8 in the
power level noted in step (b). Press example above) should read 60 r 2%.
Reset in the Status menu. The
transmitter should switch back to the
main side and the Changeover LED
should no longer be on.

(g) Select Main Menu/Peripherals/Keyer

Settings/Audio Levels.

Page 4-6 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
 (k) If the requirements of step (j) are not (e) In the Audio Levels menu, while
met, set the transmitter to operate in monitoring the Mod %, increase the
BYPASS mode. Decrease the Keying Pot value until the Mod % is as
modulation depth (Keying Pot level) to desired. If the modulating signal begins
60%. Select Main Menu/Settings/ to distort, stop increasing mod depth.
Monitor Settings/Mod % Thresholds.
Press Continue to proceed. Press (f) In the Keyer Modulation menu, set
Compute New Thresholds to Keyer to ON.
establish new monitor modulation %
thresholds. If a modification is made, 4.3.5.8 SETTING MOD DEPTH IN
a screen appears which prompts you BEACON AND VOICE MODE
to save changes to EEPROM. Select Set the modulation depth in PTT (beacon
Yes. Increase the modulation depth to and voice) mode as follows:
the desired level. Set changeover
mode to NORMAL. Return to step (g). (a) Adjust the audio limiter as described in
4.3.5.4. The audio generator should
(l) Press Reset in the Status menu. The remain connected.
transmitter should switch back to the
main side and the Changeover LED (b) Assert Press–To-Talk. The status
should no longer be on. screen should indicate press to talk.

(m) Select Main Menu/Peripherals/Keyer NOTE

Settings/Audio Levels. If the system is in normal mode, connect a
link between the PRESS-TO-TALK
(n) The modulation levels should be as terminal (TB1-12) and GND (TB1-13) on
close to desired modulation without the remote interface PWB (A2A3). If the
distortion. system is being used in phantom feed
mode, apply -15 V down the shield of the
4.3.5.7 SETTING MOD DEPTH IN audio signal (see 2.2.13).
BEACON MODE
Set the modulation depth in beacon (no (c) In the Keyer Modulation menu (see
voice) mode as follows: 3.6.13.1), set Modulation to ON and
set Keyer and Tone Generator to OFF.
(a) Ensure there is no link between the
PRESS-TO-TALK terminal (TB1-12) (d) In the Audio Levels menu (see
and GND (TB1-13) on the remote 3.6.13.1), set Voice Pot and Keying
interface PWB (A2A3). Pot to 0.

(b) In the Keyer Modulation menu (see (e) Press RF On. Increase the
3.6.13.1), set Modulation and Tone transmitter’s output to rated power.
Generator to ON and set Keyer to
OFF. Set the Tone Frequency to 400 (f) In the Audio Levels menu, while
Hz or 1020 Hz. monitoring the Mod %, increase the
Voice Pot value until the Mod % is at
(c) In the Audio Levels menu (see the desired depth. If the modulating
3.6.13.1), set Keying Pot to 0. signal begins to distort, stop increasing
the modulation depth.
(d) Press RF On. Increase the
transmitter’s output to desired power. (g) Turn off the audio generator.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-7

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
(h) In the Keyer Modulation menu, set NOTE
Modulation and Tone Generator to ON. When antenna current feedback is
Set the Tone Frequency to 400 Hz or enabled, the transmitter will adjust the
1020 Hz. output power to ensure that antenna
current remains constant. With each
(i) In the Audio Levels menu, while power adjustment, a new high and low
monitoring the Mod %, increase the forward power threshold is calculated. In
PTT Keying Pot value until the Mod % this case the low and high power
is at the desired depth. If the thresholds have essentially become low
modulating signal begins to distort, and high antenna current thresholds.
stop increasing the modulation depth.
4.3.6 Non-Standard Adjustments
(j) In the Keyer Modulation menu, set The following non-standard adjustments
Keyer to ON. are described in this section. They have
been factory set prior to shipping and do
4.3.5.9 SETTING STANDBY CODES not require verification or re-calibration
See 3.6.13.1, Setting the Keyer. unless an unintentional adjustment has
been made or a fault has occurred.
4.3.5.10 SETTING THE KEYER
See Setting the Keyer (3.6.13.1). 4.3.6.1 Setting the Number of RF Power Blocks
Installed
4.3.5.11 SETTING THE ANTENNA 4.3.6.2 Changing Frequency
CURRENT LEVEL 4.3.6.3 Changing RF Filter Tap Settings
Adjust the antenna current to the desired 4.3.6.4 Calibrating Transmitter Output Power
level and set the antenna current feedback 4.3.6.5 Calibrating Exciter Dc Voltages and
feature as follows: Ambient Temperature
4.3.6.6 Calibrating PDM
(a) Ensure the serial interface cable is 4.3.6.7 Calibrating Reflected Power Threshold
installed between the transmitter (at and Output Network Alarm
the INTERNAL RS-485 connector on 4.3.6.8 Setting the RF Monitor Level
the back of exciter/control assembly 4.3.6.9 Calibrating the Ac Failure Alarm
A2) and the ATU. 4.3.6.10 Adjusting for RF Drive Symmetry
4.3.6.11 Equalizing Exciter Gain (Dual Exciter
(b) Apply power to the ATU. Transmitters Only)
4.3.6.12 Calibrating Battery Voltage and Current
(c) In the Power menu (see 3.6.15), set (Optional)
the antenna current feedback to OFF. 4.3.6.13 Calibrating Battery Charger Current
(Optional)
(d) Adjust the transmitter for the desired 4.3.6.14 Setting Display Contrast
antenna current by adjusting the output 4.3.6.15 Adjusting Speaker Volume
power level. 4.3.6.16 Reading Modulation Level

(e) Ensure that the changeover mode and (a) Verify the initial turn-on requirements
monitor thresholds have been set (see of paragraph 4.3.4 have been
4.3.5.5) completed and are being met.

(f) In the Power menu, set the antenna

current feedback to ON.

Page 4-8 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
 4.3.6.1 SETTING THE NUMBER OF RF (a) Turn off the RF power and the ac and
POWER BLOCKS INSTALLED dc circuit breakers.
The number of required RF power blocks
depends on the transmitter’s rated output (b) Remove the rear cover from all RF
power. power blocks (A3 through A6).

x 500 W – 1 RF power block (c) Enter the frequency into Table 2-9 to
x 1,000 W – 2 RF power blocks determine the tap settings for the six
x 2,000 W – 4 RF power blocks jumpers. Connect the jumpers to the
appropriate taps.
(a) In the Power Modules menu (see
3.6.13.2) ensure that the ‘Number of (d) Install the rear cover on all RF power
Power blocks expected’ value is the blocks and perform the calibration in
correct number. If not, modify the field 4.3.6.4.
to display the correct number.
4.3.6.4 CALIBRATING TRANSMITTER
4.3.6.2 CHANGING FREQUENCY
OUTPUT POWER
To perform a frequency change, perform
Calibrate the transmitter’s forward power
the following steps in order:
and related parameters as follows:
(a) Press RF Off.
(a) Select reflected power to be monitored
on the exciter/control assembly’s front
(b) On the RF synthesizer PWB(s),
panel analog meter (see 3.6.8.2).
change the carrier frequency using
BCD switches S1 through S5. Each
(b) Select side A in the Changeover
switch represents one of the five most
Control menu. Go to the Power Module
significant digits in the carrier
menu.
frequency expressed in kHz:
(c) Monitor TP17 of interphase PDM driver
- S1 is thousands digit (x1000)
PWB A (A2A6) with an oscilloscope.
- S2 is hundreds digit (x100)
- S3 is tens digit (x10)
(d) Set the RF output to 0 W by pressing
- S4 is units digit (x1)
the Power Increase and Power
- S5 is the tenths digit (x0.1)
Decrease buttons at the same time.
(c) Perform RF drive symmetry testing
(e) Press RF On. Ensure all side A RF
and adjustment procedures (see
power module fans turn on.
4.3.6.10).
(f) While monitoring the PA voltage for all
(d) Change the RF filter tap settings (see
side A RF power modules (see
4.3.6.3).
3.6.13.2), slowly increase the RF
output power until the PA voltage is
(e) Calibrate the transmitter’s output
65 V. Stop increasing power if at any
power (see 4.3.6.4).
time:
4.3.6.3 CHANGING RF FILTER TAP
x the PA voltage between RF power
SETTINGS
modules varies by more than 5%, or
For a frequency change, change the tap
settings on the RF filter PWB of each RF
x the reflected power on the analog
power block as follows:
meter increases above 10 W

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-9

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
(g) Use an external current probe to verify x Adjust the value to 1 higher than the
that the output power per module is current Carr. Ref value. Press Done.
100 r 20 W (e.g., 400 r 80 W with four
RF power modules installed). (m) The initial Forward Power
measurement should be within 20 % of
(h) Increase power until you reach the full the actual value. In the Calibrate
rated or maximum level, whichever is Meters menu (see 3.6.12 and 3.6.12.1)
lower. Use an external current probe calibrate the Forward Power.
and the following formula to determine
the output power: x Scroll through the parameters until
Forward Power is highlighted. Press
Power = Current x Rload Modify.

(i) In the Maximum Output Gain menu x Adjust the reading to the same value
(see 3.6.12.3), calibrate the duty cycle calculated in step (h). Record this
and forward power as follows: level. Press Done.

x Highlight the value for Set Duty Cycle. (n) Increase the power until maximum
Press Modify. power is reached. Record the power
level on the top line (status bar) of the
x Change the value to match the positive GUI display.
duty cycle measured at TP17 in step
(c). Press Next. (o) Press Power Increase and Power
Decrease at the same time to set the
x Change the value for Set Forward RF power to 0 W. Press RF Off.
Power to match the power calculated
in step (h). 4.3.6.5 CALIBRATING EXCITER DC
VOLTAGES AND AMBIENT
(j) If the transmitter is operating at full TEMPERATURE
power, go to step (l). If not:
(a) Measure and record the following dc
x Highlight the value for Maximum voltages on the control/display PWB
Carrier Reference. Press Modify. (A2A1):

x Increase the value by 5. Press Done. x TP18 (approx. 24 V)

x TP12 (approx. 15 V)
(k) Return to step (h). x TP20 (approx. -15 V)
x TP9 (approx. 5 V)
(l) Set the maximum carrier reference:
(b) In the Calibrate Meters menu (see
x Record the current duty cycle and 3.6.12 and 3.6.12.1) scroll through the
forward power values. parameters until +24 Volt P/S is
highlighted. Press Modify.
x Record the power according to the
external current probe. (c) Adjust the value to match the TP18
voltage measured in step (a). Press
x Highlight the value for Maximum Done.
Carrier Reference. Press Modify.

Page 4-10 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
 (d) Repeat step (c) to calibrate the other 4.3.6.7 CALIBRATING REFLECTED
parameters: POWER THRESHOLD AND OUTPUT
NETWORK ALARM
x +15 Volt P/S (measured on TP12)
x -15 Volt P/S (measured on TP20) (a) Turn off the transmitter and disconnect
x +5 Volt P/S (measured on TP9) the dummy load from the transmitter’s
x AC Voltage RF output. Short the transmitter’s RF
x Temperature (use a thermometer to output to ground near the RF output.
measure the ambient room Install the external current probe on the
temperature shorting jumper.

NOTE (b) In the Set Thresholds menu (see

When you exit the Calibrate Meters menu a 3.6.12 and 3.6.12.2) set the Slowback
message is displayed indicating that you Pwr (Per Block) value to 100 W.
have made changes. You will be prompted
to save the changes to EEPROM so that (c) Set RF output power to 0 W. Press RF
they can be restored in the event of a On. Monitor the external current while
power failure. Press Yes each time this slowly increasing the power to half of
prompt is displayed during the setup the reflected power limit. Try to achieve
procedure. a current similar to the currents listed
below, noting the number of modules
During initial turn-on and adjustment of that are installed.
transmitter power, the diagnostic display’s
meters screen should be monitored. x One RF power module (40 W):
increase until current is 1.8 A
4.3.6.6 CALIBRATING PDM
x Two RF power modules (80 W):
(a) Use an oscilloscope to monitor TP17 of increase until current is 2.5 A
the active interphase PDM driver PWB
(A2A6 for side A or A2A10 for side B). x Three RF power modules (120 W):
increase until current is 3.1 A
(b) Press RF On.
x Four RF power modules (160 W):
(c) In the Calibrate Meters menu (see increase until current is 3.6 A
3.6.12 and 3.6.12.1) scroll through the
parameters until PDM A (or PDM B, (d) Calculate the actual reflected power
depending on the transmitter’s active using the following equation:
side) is highlighted. Press Modify.
Refld Pwr = (Ishort circuit / 2)2 x 50 :
(d) Adjust the value to match the positive
duty cycle measured on TP17 in step (e) In the Calibrate Meters menu (see
(a). Press Done. 3.6.12 and 3.6.12.1) scroll through the
parameters until Reflec. Power is
highlighted. The Reflec. Power value
should be within 20% of the value
determined in step (d).

x Press Modify.

x Adjust the value to match the level

calculated in step (d). Press Done.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-11

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
(f) Press Back and select Set 4.3.6.8 SETTING THE RF MONITOR
Thresholds. LEVEL

(g) Press Next until Refl. Power (a) Increase the transmitter’s RF output to
Shutback is displayed. full power.

(h) Monitor the external current while (b) Connect a 50 : load to the RF
slowly increasing the power to the MONITOR BNC connector (J8 of
reflected power limit. Try to achieve a remote interface PWB A2A3,
current similar to the currents listed accessible at the back of exciter/
below, noting the number of modules control assembly A2. Monitor the
that are installed. voltage with a digital multimeter.

x One RF power module (80 W): (c) Adjust the remote interface PWB’s
increase until current is 2.5 A MONITOR LEVEL potentiometer
(R168) until the voltage is 1.0 V RMS.
x Two RF power modules (160 W):
increase until current is 3.6 A 4.3.6.9 CALIBRATING THE AC FAILURE
ALARM
x Three RF power modules (240 W):
increase until current is 4.4 A (a) With the transmitter connected to a
suitably rated dummy load, press RF
x Four RF power modules (320 W): On and increase to rated power.
increase until current is 5.1 A
(b) Measure the dc voltage at TP13 on the
(i) If an Output Network alarm occurs exciter/control assembly’s control/
before reaching the reflected power display PWB (A2A1). Calculate and
limit, increase the Refl. Power record the low ac voltage reference:
Shutback threshold level and press
Done and return to step (h). Otherwise Low AC ref = 170 x TP13/Ac Voltage
continue to step (j).
(c) Monitor the dc voltage at TP19 on the
(j) Decrease the Refl. Power Shutback control/display PWB.
threshold level until the Output
Network alarm occurs. Press Done. (d) In the Set Thresholds menu (see
3.6.12 and 3.6.12.2), scroll to the Low
(k) In the Set Thresholds menu, set the AC Voltage threshold. Press Modify.
Slowback Pwr (Per Block) to 30 W.
(e) Adjust the Low AC Voltage value until
(l) Press RF On. Verify the reflected the voltage at TP19 matches the low
power cutback to below 30 x N watts, ac voltage reference calculated in step
where N is the number of RF power (b). Press Done.
blocks (1-4) installed. Press RF Off.
(f) Turn off the transmitter’s ac power. If
(m) Remove the shorting jumper from the testing is required, connect a variac
transmitter’s RF output. Reconnect the between the ac power source and the
dummy load to the transmitter’s RF transmitter. Turn on the ac power.
output.

Page 4-12 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
 (g) Use the variac to decrease the ac (a) Go to the Power Module Status menu
voltage until the System Diagram’s AC (see 3.6.13.2).
Mains LED. The Diagnostic Display
should display both Shutback A and (b) Use an oscilloscope to monitor TP17 of
Low AC. Record the ac voltage. interphase PDM driver PWB A (A2A6).

(h) Press RF Off. (c) On interphase PDM driver PWB A

(A2A6), adjust the GAIN TRIM
(i) Turn off the ac power and disconnect potentiometer (R31) four turns counter
the variac. Reconnect ac to the clockwise and one and a half turns
transmitter. clockwise. On interphase PDM driver
PWB B (A2A10), adjust the GAIN
4.3.6.10 ADJUSTING FOR RF DRIVE TRIM potentiometer (R31) four turns
SYMMETRY counter clockwise.
Measure the symmetry of the RF drive
applied from the active RF synthesizer (d) Press RF On. Increase the
PWB to the RF power modules as follows: transmitter’s RF output to full rated or
maximum power, whichever is lower.
(a) Select the side for the symmetry
adjustment. (e) Use an external current probe to
measure RF output power:
(b) Press RF On and set the transmitter’s
RF output power to 0 W. Power = Current2 x Rload

(c) Connect an oscilloscope between TP2 (f) In the Maximum Output Gain menu
(TP1 for side B) and ground on the (see 3.6.12.3), calibrate the duty cycle
exciter interface PWB (A2A2). and forward power as follows:

(d) The oscilloscope should indicate a x Highlight the value for Set Duty Cycle.
symmetrical (50% duty cycle) square Press Modify.
wave with a nominal amplitude of 5 V
peak-to-peak. x Change the value to match the positive
duty cycle measured at TP17 in step
(e) Adjust the appropriate RF synthesizer (c). Press Next.
PWB’s SYMMETRY potentiometer
(R32) to obtain a 50 r 1 % duty cycle. x Change the value for Set Forward
Power to match the power calculated
NOTE in step (f). Press Done.
If an external RF generator is producing
the RF drive, verify its output waveform is (g) If the transmitter is operating at full
symmetrical. power, go to step (o). If not:

4.3.6.11 EQUALIZING EXCITER GAIN x Highlight the value for Maximum

(Dual Exciter Transmitters Only) Carrier Reference. Press Modify.
If the RF output of the transmitter varies
between side A and B, you may need to x Increase the value by 5. Press Done.
equalize the exciter gain. Equalize the
PDM pulse train between sides A and B so (h) Repeat step (e).
that no change in RF output level occurs
during exciter changeover, as follows:

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-13

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
(i) Set the maximum carrier reference: (b) In the Calibrate Meters menu (see
3.6.12 and 3.6.12.1) scroll through the
x Record the current duty cycle and parameters until Battery Voltage is
forward power values. highlighted. Press Modify.

x Record the power according to the (c) Adjust the value to match the voltage
external current probe. measured in step (a). Press Done.

x Highlight the value for Maximum NOTE

Carrier Reference. Press Modify. When you exit the Calibrate Meters menu a
message is displayed indicating that you
x Adjust the value to 1 higher than the have made changes. You will be prompted
current Carr. Ref value. Press Done. to save the changes to EEPROM so that
they can be restored in the event of a
(j) Increase the power until maximum power failure. Press Yes each time this
power is reached. Record the power prompt is displayed during the setup
level on the top line (status bar) of the procedure.
GUI display.
(d) In the Power Source Select menu,
(k) Press Power Increase and Power change the transmitter’s Requested
Decrease at the same time to set the Power Source to DC (see 3.6.9).
RF power to 0 W. Press RF Off.
(e) Press RF On and increase the RF
(l) Select side B in the Changeover output to rated power.
Control menu.
(f) Use a clip-on dc current meter to
(m) Press RF On. Ensure all side B RF measure the current between the
power module fans are on. battery and TB1-1 of the dc distribution
assembly (A7).
(n) Press Power Increase until you reach
maximum power. Adjust GAIN TRIM (g) In the Calibrate Meters menu scroll
potentiometer R31 on interphase PDM through the parameters until Battery
driver PWB B (A2A10) to ensure that Current is highlighted. Press Modify.
the output power matches the output
power recorded in step (k). (h) Adjust the value to match the voltage
measured in step (f). Press Done.
4.3.6.12 CALIBRATING BATTERY
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT (Optional) 4.3.6.13 CALIBRATING BATTERY
CHARGER CURRENT (Optional)
NOTE
This procedure applies to transmitters that NOTE
use a dc power source and the dc This procedure applies to transmitters that
distribution assembly (A7). use a dc power source and the dc
distribution assembly (A7).
(a) Measure and record the dc voltage
between TB1-1 and TB1-2 on the dc (a) Press RF Off.
distribution assembly (A7).

Page 4-14 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
 (b) Open the dc breaker. Disconnect the (b) Select side A in the Changeover
battery from the terminal block at the Control menu. Set the exciter in CW
rear of the dc power distribution mode: use  and  to scroll the
assembly (A7). Connect a 200 W, display and set Modulation to OFF
50 : resistor across TB1-1 and TB1-2. using the Toggle switch.
Re-apply ac power to the transmitter.
(c) Adjust the oscilloscope’s timescale to
(c) Calculate the ‘Charger Current’ by 500 Ps per division (for 400 Hz
dividing the voltage measured between modulation). Adjust the amplitude
TB1-1 and TB1-2 by 50. level of the oscilloscope to just cover
all eight divisions of the display with
(d) In the Calibrate Meters menu scroll the RF signal (see Figure 4-2).
through the parameters until Battery
Current is highlighted. Press Modify.

(e) Adjust the value to match the ‘Charger

Current’ voltage from step (c). Press
Done.

(f) Remove ac power from the transmitter.

(g) Remove the 50 : resistor and

reconnect the battery to TB1. Close the
dc breaker. Re-apply ac power to the
transmitter.
Figure 4-2: CW signal set to fill display
4.3.6.14 SETTING DISPLAY CONTRAST
Set the contrast of the diagnostic display’s (d) Adjust the position of the oscilloscope
GUI as follows: signal so that the bottom of the CW
waveform is at the mid-point of the
(a) In the Set Thresholds menu (see display (see Figure 4-3).
3.6.12 and 3.6.12.2), scroll to the LCD
Display Contrast threshold. Press
Modify.

(b) Adjust the contrast to the desired level.

Press Done.

4.3.6.15 ADJUSTING SPEAKER

VOLUME
See Setting Protection Thresholds
(3.6.12.2). Adjust the Audio parameter as
desired.

4.3.6.16 READING MODULATION LEVEL

Read the modulation level as follows: Figure 4-3: CW signal with position
adjusted to mid-point of display
(a) Connect an oscilloscope to the RF
MONITOR connector (J8) at the back
of the exciter/control assembly (A2).

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 4-15

Section 4 Testing and Adjustment Issue 2.0
(e) Set the exciter in MCW mode: use  (g) If the modulation level requires
and  to scroll the display and set adjustment select Main Menu/
Modulation to ON and the Keyer to Peripherals/Keyer Settings/Audio
OFF using the Toggle switch. Levels.

(f) Measure the bottom of the waveform. (h) Adjust the Keying Pot (in Press-to-talk
Each sub-division should correspond mode adjust the PTT Keying Pot) to
to 5% in modulation. The bottom of get the desired level of modulation.
the waveform should be one sub- This adjustment will affect both
division above the bottom of the exciters.
display when the modulation is at 95%
(see Figure 4-4). (i) Check if the reading on the diagnostic
display is the oscilloscope
NOTE measurement. If necessary calibrate
There may be some distortion in the the meter as described in 3.6.12.1.
trough. This is an effect of class D
amplification called pinch off and can be (j) Select side B in the Changeover
ignored as it does not produce significant Control menu. Repeat step (f) to verify
total harmonic distortion (THD). the modulation level for side B. If
necessary, calibrate side B to match
side A by adjusting the Side B Scaling
factor (see 3.6.14.1).

Figure 4-4: MCW signal, 95% modulation

Page 4-16 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 4 Testing and Adjustment
Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 GENERAL x Once a year, inspect and clean air

This section contains scheduled and filters using soap and warm water. If the
corrective maintenance information for the air filters are damaged, replace them as
Vector transmitter. Fault symptoms should soon as possible.
be analyzed to determine the corrective
action required. Troubleshooting x Once a year, clean the transmitter
information (see paragraph 5.5) is using a vacuum cleaner and a soft-
presented based on the exciter panel’s bristle brush to remove loose dirt. Use
diagnostic information. clean, damp rags to remove dirt that
cannot be vacuumed. NEVER use
CAUTION compressed air to clean the
The Vector transmitter contains many solid transmitter.
state devices that may be damaged if
subjected to excessive heat or high voltage 5.2.2 Checking Hardware
transients. Ensure circuits are not All hardware MUST be checked at least
overdriven or disconnected from their loads once a year. Thermal cycling from turning
while turned on. the transmitter on and off will require more
frequent checks.
5.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Scheduled maintenance consists of x Ensure the proper sized tools are used
performing a visual inspection of the to prevent damaging the hardware. In
transmitter at scheduled intervals. The most cases, hardware is metric.
recommended minimum time between
scheduled maintenance visits is three x A mounting surface or terminal that
months. Local operating and environmental has changed colour indicates a loose
conditions may dictate more frequent visits hardware connection.
and in remote sites, less frequent visits
may be acceptable. Experience and x Multi-stranded cables installed on
system reliability will determine the most terminal strips MUST be re-torqued.
practical schedule for a specific installation.
5.2.3 Battery Replacement
5.2.1 Cleaning the Transmitter The transmitter's control/display PWB
As a minimum, perform the following contains a battery backup circuit that
cleaning procedures: provides a memory of alarm occurrences
during ac power failure. The battery
NOTE should be replaced at least once a year or
A site located in a dirty area using open-air whenever the diagnostic display on the
cooling requires more extensive cleaning exciter/control assembly’s front panel
than a site located in a clean area using indicates a ‘low NVRM battery’ message.
closed-air cooling.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-1

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
5.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5.3.2 Off-Air and Standby Side
Corrective maintenance procedures consist Troubleshooting
of identifying and correcting defects or Off-air troubleshooting is performed when
deficiencies that arise during operation of proper operation cannot be restored. In
the transmitter. Local/remote alarm signals dual side (A and B) transmitters, if an
are generated when a malfunction occurs. active side PWB or assembly is defective,
The nature of the fault and station policy the transmitter automatically changes over
dictates whether immediate maintenance allowing safe replacement of the defective
response is necessary. Fault analysis and PWB or assembly. You can remove an RF
rectification may be conducted from three power module from the active side, but a
different levels with a different technical changeover (for dual side applications) or
competence level required for each. inhibit (for single side applications) will
occur. Troubleshooting for a majority of
5.3.1 On-Air Troubleshooting standby side faults can be performed using
On-air troubleshooting can be performed the test standby side troubleshooting menu
from a remote location or locally at the (paragraph 3.6.13.4).
transmitter site.
For off-air troubleshooting procedures,
5.3.1.1 Remote Troubleshooting Nautel recommends you connect the
Remote on-air troubleshooting consists of output to a precision 50 :, resistive
monitoring the transmitter's RF output dummy load (rated for twice the
using an on-air monitor and polling the transmitter’s maximum carrier power). If a
status of the transmitter using the optional suitable dummy load is not available, the
remote control and monitoring software. transmitter may remain connected to its
This information enables you to decide if a antenna for these procedures. When it is
response is deferred to a more convenient necessary to troubleshoot faults in the
time, if immediate corrective action is power amplifier stage, reduce the RF
taken, and whether a standby transmitter is output level to a minimal value when the
enabled (if available). Nautel recommends RF output is connected to the antenna.
you incorporate the significance of remote
indications and the appropriate responses 5.4 ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTION
into the station’s standard operating The transmitter's assemblies contain
procedures. Refer to paragraph 5.5 to semiconductor devices that may be
determine the troubleshooting action damaged by electrostatic discharge. Before
required for a given fault. removing an assembly from the transmitter,
and while servicing an assembly, observe
5.3.1.2 Local Troubleshooting the following precautions:
Local on-air troubleshooting consists of
monitoring the transmitter's diagnostic NOTE
display and fault alarm indicators. Analysis Electrostatic energy is produced when two
of their status normally identifies the type of insulating materials are rubbed together. A
fault and in most cases determines what person wearing rubber-soled shoes,
corrective action must be taken. Refer to walking across a nylon carpet or a waxed
paragraph 5.5 to determine the floor can generate an extremely large
troubleshooting action required for a given electrostatic charge. This effect is
fault. magnified during periods of low humidity.
This high voltage may damage
components such as integrated circuits,
field-effect transistors, thyristors, and
Schottky diodes unless adequate
precautions are taken.

Page 5-2 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
 5.4.1 Discharging of Personnel x The diagnostic display’s meter screen
Maintainers should be electrically has real-time meter indications (e.g.,
discharged by a suitable grounding forward power) to assist in fault
system (anti-static mats, grounding analysis.
straps) during removal of an assembly
from the exciter and while handling the x The diagnostic display’s main screen
assembly for maintenance procedures. will indicate when a fault is occurring.
Press the Status soft key to display all
5.4.2 Handling/Storage active faults.
A sub-assembly should be placed in an
anti-static bag when it is not installed in the x The diagnostic display’s Events Log
exciter or when it is not being subjected to (see paragraph 3.6.5) provides a
maintenance procedures. Electronic chronological list of faults/events as
components should be stored in anti-static well as root cause information to assist
materials. in fault diagnosis.

5.4.3 Tools/Test Equipment NOTE

Testing and maintenance equipment, It is important to consider both the real-time
including soldering (for example: Irons with and the logged information when
grounded tips) and unsoldering tools, troubleshooting. Displayed active faults
should be suitable for contact with static may or may not be the root cause of the
sensitive semiconductor devices. problem. The Events Log displays the root
cause of an event (i.e., the first fault
5.4.4 Stress Current Protection detected), which may have been transient,
Protect static sensitive semiconductor but resulted in other faults that remain
devices from unnecessary stress current active. It also displays the status of certain
as follows: parameters at the time of the event.

x Ensure electrical connections are not (a) Determine the origin of the fault by
broken while current is flowing in the noting which of the system diagram’s
circuit. lamps has turned on. If no system
diagram lamp is on, proceed to step (b)
x Ensure voltages are not present on for non-alarm troubleshooting tips.
external control/monitoring circuits
when they are connected. NOTE
In dual side (A and B) transmitters, some
5.5 TROUBLESHOOTING FRONT faults will also initiate a Changeover
PANEL ALARMS alarm. In this case, the transmitter will
Front panel fault analysis can be performed continue to operate using the standby side.
from the exciter panel. There are several This may allow troubleshooting (and
ways to use the front panel to determine subsequent repair) to be deferred to a
the occurrence and origin of a fault: more convenient time.

x The system diagram is a flow diagram NOTE

that indicates the operational status of The troubleshooting procedures in this
various sections of the transmitter. If a manual are limited to module level checks
lamp is on (red), a fault is occurring in and sub-assembly replacement.
the associated section of the
transmitter.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-3

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
(b) From the diagnostic display’s main NOTE
screen, press the Status button. Note For dual side transmitters, a changeover
the alarm indication(s) and refer to to the standby side should also occur.
Table 5-1 for troubleshooting tips, Determine which side caused the fault,
which may also reference replacement noting it is the opposite side to that
and subsequent re-calibration displayed on the transmitter status bar at
procedures. the top of the diagnostic display.

(c) The diagnostic display will indicate the Viewing the diagnostic display’s Events
current active faults and more Log (see paragraph 3.6.5) can also assist
specifically identify the nature of the in diagnosing a fault.
fault.
(f) Other fault indications may prompt the
e.g., PDM Drive A Fail troubleshooter to replace other PWBs
or assemblies in the exciter/control
(d) Attempt to clear the alarm by pressing assembly or an RF power block (e.g.,
the reset button. If the alarm persists, PA Alarm A 1 indicates a fault has
it will not be cleared from the display. occurred on the side A RF power
module in RF power block 1).
(e) In the example given in step (c), a
PDM Drive A Fail has occurred NOTE
indicating a problem with exciter A’s Replacement procedures (paragraphs 5.8
interphase PDM driver PWB. The and 5.9) are provided for RF power
suspect PWB should be replaced as modules and PWBs/assemblies that
detailed in paragraph 5.8.1.2. require specific removal/installation or
adjustment instructions. Instructions have
not been included for assemblies that are
straightforward to replace and require no
re-calibration.

(g) If replacement of a suspect PWB or

assembly does not remove the fault
condition, contact Nautel.

Page 5-4 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-1: Troubleshooting and Replacement Tips
Front Panel Status See Troubleshooting/ See Re-calibration
Action
LED Message Replacement Paragraph Paragraph
AC Mains Low AC Voltage The ac voltage is less than 170 V ac. If the ac source voltage is present, check/replace fuses [side A (F3 and N/A N/A
F4) and side B (F1 and F2)] on the ac power distribution assembly (A8).

Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS Fault A or B Replace associated LVPS buck converter PWB [side A (A2A7) or exciter B (A2A11)] and/or ac/dc universal N/A N/A
input power supply [side A (A2U2) or side B (A2U3)].

Power Supply Over Voltage PS Replace switch mode power supply PWB (A2 of associated RF power module). 5.6.1 3.6.13.4 (ensure the
A or B, 1 to 4 replaced/repaired module is
on the standby side)
Power Supply Over Current PS Check/replace associated fuses (F5 through F10, see assembly silkscreen) on the ac power distribution 5.6.1 3.6.13.4 (ensure the
A or B, 1 to 4 assembly (A8). If fuses are OK, replace switch mode power supply PWB (A2 of associated RF power replaced/repaired module is
module). on the standby side)

If the transmitter is running in dc mode (optional), and this alarm is indicated for all modules on the active
side, replace battery boost supply A7U1. Otherwise, check cabling between A7 and A3 through A6.

Power Supply High Temp PS Check fans. Ensure they are spinning at an adequate speed (a minimum of 3000 RPM, see 3.6.13.2). If N/A N/A
A or B, 1 to 4 necessary, replace the appropriate fan.

Power Supply PS A or B Missing Modules, 1 to 4 An RF power module has been removed from the associated side. N/A N/A

PA Modulator Fail Check/replace FET on modulator assembly (A5 of associated RF power module). 5.6.1 3.6.13.4 (ensure the
A or B, 1 to 4 5.7 replaced/repaired module is
on the standby side)
PA PA Alarm Check/replace FETs on power amplifier (A3 of associated RF power module). 5.6.1 3.6.13.4 (ensure the
A or B, 1 to 4 5.7 replaced/repaired module is
on the standby side)
PA PDM Inhibit A or B A module has been removed from the transmitter. A PS Missing Module message will indicate which module N/A N/A
has been removed.

Exciter Low NVRAM Bty Replace battery BT1 on the control/display PWB (A2A1). N/A N/A

Exciter RF Fail A or B Replace the RF synthesizer PWB [side A (A2A5) or side B (A2A9)]. 5.8.1.1 4.3.6.10

Exciter PDM Latch A or B Check/replace associated fuses (F5 through F20, see assembly silkscreen) on the ac power distribution 5.8.1.2 4.3.6.4 (single side) or
assembly (A8). If fuses are OK, change the active side of the exciter and run a standby side test on the 4.3.6.11 (dual side)
power supply (see 3.6.13.4). If a fault is detected, replace switch mode power supply PWB of faulty power 3.6.13.4 (ensure the
module. If no fault is detected, replace interphase PDM driver PWB [side A (A2A6) or exciter B (A2A10)]. replaced/repaired module is
on the standby side)

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-5

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
 Table 5-1: Troubleshooting and Replacement Tips (Continued)
Front Panel Status See Troubleshooting/ See Re-calibration
Action
LED Message Replacement Paragraph Paragraph
Exciter Monitor Fault Indicates a fault in a monitor PWB. The Monitor Fault will be accompanied by an indication of the fault. If it is 5.8.2 4.3.5.5 (if applicable)
A or B not accompanied by a specific fault, replace the exciter monitor/generator PWB [side A (A2A8) or side B 4.3.5.6 (if applicable)
(A2A12)]. 4.3.5.7 (if applicable)
4.3.5.8 (if applicable)
4.3.5.9 (if applicable)
4.3.5.10
Exciter E/G not responding A or B Indicates that an exciter monitor/generator PWB is not responding. Replace the exciter monitor/generator 5.8.2 4.3.5.5 (if applicable)
PWB [side A (A2A8) or side B (A2A12)]. 4.3.5.6 (if applicable)
4.3.5.7 (if applicable)
4.3.5.8 (if applicable)
4.3.5.9 (if applicable)
4.3.5.10
Exciter Mon PGM Fault A or B Indicates that an exciter monitor/generator PWB has an EEPROM or Flash memory error. Replace the 5.8.2 4.3.5.5 (if applicable)
exciter monitor/generator PWB [side A (A2A8) or side B (A2A12)]. 4.3.5.6 (if applicable)
4.3.5.7 (if applicable)
4.3.5.8 (if applicable)
4.3.5.9 (if applicable)
4.3.5.10
Exciter Keying Gate Monitor Fail A or B Indicates that the tone level is not at the correct level. Ensure that the thresholds have been set up correctly. 5.8.2 4.3.5.5 (if applicable)
If they have been, and the tone is at an adequate level, replace the exciter monitor/generator PWB [side A 4.3.5.6 (if applicable)
(A2A8) or side B (A2A12)]. As long as this fault persists, output power is inhibited. 4.3.5.7 (if applicable)
4.3.5.8 (if applicable)
4.3.5.9 (if applicable)
4.3.5.10
Exciter Pwr. Monitor Fail A or B Indicates that the transmitter’s output power is outside of the desired thresholds. If there is no accompanying 5.7 3.6.13.4 (ensure the
error message, a power amplifier (A3) in an RF power block may be damaged. Try operating the transmitter replaced/repaired module is
at rated power. If the problem persists, check/replace FETs on the associated power amplifier. on the standby side)

Exciter Mod Depth Fault A or B Indicates that the transmitter’s modulation depth is below the desired low limit. Ensure that the thresholds 5.8.2 4.3.5.5 (if applicable)
have been set up correctly. If they have been, and the mod depth is at an adequate level, replace the exciter 4.3.5.6 (if applicable)
monitor/generator PWB [side A (A2A8) or side B (A2A12)]. 4.3.5.7 (if applicable)
4.3.5.8 (if applicable)
4.3.5.9 (if applicable)
4.3.5.10
Exciter Monitor Fail Indicates that one, not both, of the exciter monitor/ generator PWBs [side A (A2A8) or exciter B (A2A12)] 5.8.2 4.3.5.5 (if applicable)
requested a changeover. It is typical for a brief monitor fail event to occur after a changeover. 4.3.5.6 (if applicable)
If the problem persists and the transmitter is not operating near an alarm threshold, replace the faulty exciter 4.3.5.7 (if applicable)
monitor/generator PWB [side A (A2A8) or side B (A2A12)]. 4.3.5.8 (if applicable)
4.3.5.9 (if applicable)
4.3.5.10

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-6

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
Table 5-1: Troubleshooting and Replacement Tips (Continued)
Front Panel Status See Troubleshooting/ See Re-calibration
Action
LED Message Replacement Paragraph Paragraph
Output Network SWR Shutback RF power has been inhibited due to high reflected power. Check the RF path between the transmitter’s RF N/A N/A
output and the antenna system. An SWR alarm occurs if the sensed reflected power level exceeds an SWR
of 2:1 or 1.5:1.
If the instantaneous peak SWR exceeds 2:1, the RF output is shut back. The power level will automatically
recover to its previous level. If two consecutive SWR shutbacks occur within a two second period, the RF
output is cut back (see SWR Slowback).

Output Network Cutback Level There are 18 steps (or cutback levels) available. The transmitter will continue decreasing or increasing the N/A N/A
1-18 RF output power until normal operating power is achieved, at which point the SWR alarm will disappear.
If the average peak SWR exceeds 1.5:1, the RF output is cut back (reduced) until the reflected power level
falls below the 1.5:1 level.

During an SWR alarm, the System Diagram’s Output Network alarm lamp blinks and the Diagnostic Display
indicates a Shutback (if the reflected power is greater than 2:1 SWR) as well as the cutback level.

Changeover Monitor Changeover Check the accompanying error message to determine the cause of the changeover. N/A N/A

Changeover Monitor Shutdown Check the accompanying error message to determine the cause of the shutdown. N/A N/A

External Alarm Ext Interlock Open An external interlock circuit is open. Check the integrity of the circuitry connected between terminals TB1-19 N/A N/A
and TB1-20 of the remote interface PWB (A2A3).

External Alarm Charger Alarm Check for battery charger failure. N/A N/A

External Alarm Low Battery Voltage The battery voltage is below the low voltage threshold. N/A N/A

External Alarm ATU Not Responding The associated ATU is not responding. N/A N/A

External Alarm RCMI Not Responding The NDB site interface PWB is not responding. Replace the NDB site interface PWB. N/A 4.3.5.1
4.3.5.3

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-7

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
 Table 5-1: Troubleshooting and Replacement Tips (Continued)
Front Panel Status See Troubleshooting/ See Re-calibration
Action
LED Message Replacement Paragraph Paragraph
- - Replace the RF power probe (A1A1). N/A 4.3.6.4

- - Replace the optional dc control/monitor PWB (A7A1). N/A 4.3.6.12 (if applicable)
4.3.6.13 (if applicable)

- - Replace the modulator filter PWB (A1A4 or A2A4 of the applicable RF power block). N/A 3.6.13.4 (ensure the
replaced/repaired module is
on the standby side)

- - Replace the RF filter PWB (A5 of the applicable RF power block). N/A 4.3.6.3

- - Replace the control/display PWB (A2A1). N/A 4.3.5.1

4.3.5.2
4.3.5.3 (if applicable)
4.3.5.5 (if applicable)
4.3.5.11
4.3.6.1
4.3.6.4 (single side) or
4.3.6.11 (dual side)
4.3.6.5
4.3.6.6
4.3.6.9
4.3.6.12 (if applicable)
4.3.6.13 (if applicable)
4.3.6.14

- - Replace the remote interface PWB (A2A3). N/A 4.3.5.9 (if applicable)
4.3.5.10 (if applicable)
4.3.5.11 (if applicable)
4.3.6.8

NOTE: PWBs and assemblies that are not referenced in this table do not require special replacement or re-calibration procedures.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-8

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
 5.6 REPLACING AN RF POWER 5.6.2 RF Power Module Installation
MODULE
The diagnostic display status messages (a) Lift the operational RF power module
indicate which RF power module caused into the appropriate transmitter RF
an alarm. In dual side applications (A and power block. Carefully slide the module
B), the transmitter should change over to toward the rear of the RF power block
operate on the standby side. and firmly push it into place.

NOTE (b) Gently tighten the spring-loaded

A defective RF power module can be securing screw located at the bottom,
removed for repair as described below. front of the RF power module. Do not
After removing the RF power module (in over tighten this screw; it only needs to
dual side applications), the transmitter can be finger-tight.
resume operation on its standby side.
(c) Press Reset in the status menu. Verify
CAUTION the PA or Power Supply lamp on the
RF power modules contain solid-state exciter/control assembly’s system
devices that can be damaged if subjected diagram turns off. In single side
to excessive heat or high voltage applications, the transmitter should
transients. Ensure circuits are not resume operation at the desired
overdriven or disconnected from their loads operating level.
while turned on.
(d) Install the RF power block’s front cover
5.6.1 RF Power Module Removal using four M5 screws.

(a) Remove the front cover from the 5.7 FET CHECKING/
associated RF power block 1 (A3) REPLACEMENT
through 4 (A6) as applicable (see The transmitter contains many FETs and
Figure MD-1) by removing four M5 other switching semiconductor devices.
screws. The FETs most likely to fail are in the RF
power modules (A and B, as applicable) in
(b) Loosen the securing screw at the each RF power block (1 through 4, as
bottom, front of the appropriate RF applicable). For failures caused in an RF
power module (side A module on the power module, remove the module (see
left, side B module on the right). 5.6.1), check the devices listed below and,
Carefully pull the RF power module out if necessary, replace them.
of the transmitter cabinet.
x FETs Q1 and Q2 (Nautel Part # QR54)
(c) Replace a defective FET (see 5.7) or of switch mode power supply PWB A2
an entire PWB or assembly (see (see Figures MD-15 and MD-17)
Figure MD-15) as necessary.
x power MOSFETs Q1 through Q4
NOTE (Nautel Part # QAP49) of power
If an operational RF power module is amplifier A3 (see Figures MD-15 and
available, you can install it in the MD-18)
transmitter while you repair the defective
module. Refer to paragraph 5.6.2 to install x power MOSFET Q1 (Nautel Part #
an RF power module. QAP49) of modulator A5 (see Figure
MD-15; same device as in power
amplifier A3, see MD-18)

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-9

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
(a) Unsolder the gate pins of the FET (h) If the requirement of step (g) is met,
under test and all parallel devices. the FET is operational. Turn it off as
Refer to the assembly’s electrical detailed in step (b) and proceed to the
schematic in Section 9 to determine next suspect device. If the
the parallel devices, if applicable. requirement of step (g) is not met,
Refer to the assembly’s detail drawing replace the device as detailed in steps
in Section 10 to verify pin-out. (i) through (m).

NOTE (i) Unsolder the drain and source pins of

To turn on a FET under test, apply a dc the defective device.
voltage between its gate and source
terminals. Some digital multimeters have (j) Remove the hardware securing the
enough dc voltage (9 V battery device in place and remove the
recommended) on their test leads when defective device. Clean the
set to the ‘diode’ or ‘resistance’ positions. associated heat sink surface near the
If not, obtain another dc voltage source. input PWB.

(b) Turn off the FET by shorting the gate NOTE

and source. Using a digital multimeter, FETs are static sensitive. Handle
momentarily place the negative lead replacement devices in a manner that
on the gate pin and positive lead on protects the FETs from static.
the source pin for each FET in the
circuit. (k) Apply a thin, even coat of thermal
compound on the bottom of the new
(c) Measure the drain-source resistance device.
with the positive lead on the drain and
the negative lead on the source. The (l) Reinstall the device on its cleaned
digital multimeter should indicate an heat sink using the hardware removed
open circuit. in step (j). Replace the Belleville
(cupped) washer with a new washer
(d) Measure the drain-source resistance (Nautel Part # HZ48, located in
with the negative lead on the drain ancillary kit). Apply a thin, even coat
and the positive lead on the source. of thermal compound to both sides of
The digital multimeter should indicate the insulator (if replaced). Refer to the
a diode pedestal. assembly’s detail drawing in Section
10 to verify the hardware orientation
(e) If the requirements of steps (c) and (d) for the device being replaced.
are not met, replace the device as
detailed in steps (i) through (m). (m) Using a torque screwdriver, tighten
the mounting hardware to the value
(f) Turn on the device under test by (typically 3 to 4 inch-pounds) specified
placing the positive lead on the gate on the assembly’s detail drawing in
and the negative lead on the source. Section 10, ensuring that the pins of
the device are aligned with their
(g) Measure the drain-source resistance corresponding solder terminals.
with the positive lead on the drain and Solder the pins to their associated
the negative lead on the source. The terminals.
digital multimeter reading should
indicate a short circuit.

Page 5-10 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
 5.8 EXCITER/CONTROL ASSEMBLY 5.8.1.1 RF SYNTHESIZER PWB
PWB REPLACEMENT REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT
Remove the exciter/control assembly (A2,
see Figures MD-3 and MD-4) from the (a) Remove six sets of mounting hardware
transmitter, replace defective printed wiring from the RF synthesizer PWB being
boards (PWB), and perform necessary replaced (A2A5 or A2A9). If the exciter
adjustments as follows: interface PWB is to be removed (see
5.8.1.3), remove both RF synthesizer
(a) Press the Control - RF OFF switch. PWBs, if applicable, and go to 5.8.1.2.
Turn off the ac power and disconnect
the dc supply, if applicable. (b) Pull the PWB(s) away from the exciter
interface PWB (A2A2). It may be
(b) Gain access to the exciter/control helpful to gently pry the connector loose
assembly (A2) by removing it from the with a screwdriver.
transmitter. It is secured by four front
panel screws and is installed on (c) Install the new RF synthesizer PWB by
extendable slides. reversing the steps above.

(c) Remove all connections to the rear of (d) Re-install the exciter/control assembly
the exciter/control assembly. Some in the transmitter by reversing the steps
cables originate from inside the in 5.8. Leave the top cover off until
transmitter cabinet and others originate testing and adjustment is complete.
from remote sources.
(e) Install all shorting jumpers on the
(d) Remove the exciter/control assembly replacement PWB in the same position
from its slides and place it on a suitable as the replaced PWB.
work surface.
(f) Verify the carrier frequency is set using
(e) Remove the exciter/control assembly’s BCD switches S1 through S5. Each
top and bottom covers. switch represents one of the five most
significant digits in the carrier
(f) Replace the appropriate assembly or frequency expressed in kHz:
PWB (see 5.8.1 or 5.8.2).
- S1 is thousands digit (x1000)
5.8.1 Exciter Interface PWB and - S2 is hundreds digit (x100)
Interconnecting PWB Replacement - S3 is tens digit (x10)
The exciter interface PWB (A2A1) - S4 is units digit (x1)
physically interconnects with the RF - S5 is the tenths digit (x0.1)
synthesizer PWBs (A2A5 and A2A9) and
the interphase PDM driver PWBs (A2A6 NOTE
and A2A10). Removing the exciter interface When an RF synthesizer PWB configured
PWB involves removing its interconnecting to operate from an external RF drive
PWBs first. Complete the instructions in the source is installed in a transmitter, its
sub-paragraphs (5.8.1.1, 5.8.1.2, and/or frequency synthesizer must be operational
5.8.1.3) to replace the appropriate PWB. and its BCD switches must be set to
Complete all three paragraphs if replacing produce the assigned carrier frequency.
the exciter interface PWB. The synthesizer's output is used to obtain
the 2(gPDM) output which ultimately
determines the host transmitter's pulse
duration modulation frequency (gPDM).

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 5-11

Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Issue 2.0
(g) Perform RF drive symmetry testing (c) Install the new exciter interface PWB.
and adjustment procedures (see Re-install connections to the top and
4.3.6.10). bottom sides. Use the connector tag
labels or the connector mating
(h) Replace the exciter/control assembly’s information in Table 8-3 to determine
top cover. proper connections.

5.8.1.2 INTERPHASE PDM DRIVER PWB (d) Set all shorting jumpers as per the
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT original exciter interface PWB.

(a) Remove and retain four sets of (e) Re-install the interphase PDM driver
mounting hardware for the interphase PWB(s) removed in paragraph 5.8.1.1.
PDM driver PWB being replaced (A2A6
or A2A10). If the exciter interface PWB (f) Re-install the exciter/control assembly
is to be removed (see 5.8.1.3, remove in the transmitter by reversing the steps
both interphase PDM driver PWBs, if in paragraph 5.8.
applicable, and go to 5.8.1.3.
(g) Install the top and bottom covers.
(b) Pull the PWB(s) away from the exciter
interface PWB (A2A2). It may be 5.8.2 Exciter Monitor/Generator
helpful to gently pry the connector loose PWB Replacement
with a screwdriver. Remove the exciter/monitor generator PWB
(A2A8 and, for dual exciter transmitters,
(c) Install the new interphase PDM driver A2A12) as follows.
PWB by reversing the steps above.
(a) Remove and retain four sets of
(d) Re-install the exciter/control assembly mounting hardware for the exciter
by reversing the steps in paragraph 5.8. monitor/generator PWB being replaced.

(e) Verify that shorting jumper E1 is (b) Remove all connections to the top and
installed in the A position. bottom of the exciter monitor/generator
PWB.
(f) Leave the covers off until testing and
adjustment is complete. (c) Pull the PWB away from the remote
interface PWB (A2A3). It may be
(g) For dual transmitters, perform the helpful to gently pry the connector loose
Equalizing Exciter Gain adjustment with a screwdriver.
procedure (see 4.3.6.11). For a single
transmitter perform the Calibrating (d) Install the new exciter monitor/
Transmitter Output Power adjustment generator PWB. Re-install connections
procedure (see 4.3.6.4). to the top and bottom sides. Use the
connector tag labels or the connector
5.8.1.3 EXCITER INTERFACE PWB mating information in Section 8 to
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT determine proper connections.

(a) Remove all connections to the top and (e) Install the top and bottom covers.
bottom of the exciter interface PWB.
(f) Perform the following calibration
(b) Remove and retain 13 sets of mounting procedures: 4.3.5.5, 4.3.5.6, 4.3.5.7,
hardware for the exciter interface PWB. 4.3.5.8, 4.3.5.9 and 4.3.5.10.
Remove the PWB.

Page 5-12 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Section 6 THEORY OF OPERATION

6.1 INTRODUCTION Local control/monitoring is done using
The theory of operation for the Vector front panel membrane switches and a
Radio Beacon transmitter is presented in graphic liquid crystal display. Critical
this section. Frequent reference is made to parameters such as forward power,
electrical schematics (e.g., Figure SD-1). reflected power and antenna current can
They are located in Section 9 of this also be displayed on an analog meter on
manual. Circuits that are shown on the front of the exciter assembly.
electrical schematics, but not described in
this section are either beyond the scope of Remote control and monitoring can be
this manual or are not used for NDB provided over several optional interfaces.
applications. The transmitter also has provision to
interface with a Nautel antenna tuning unit
6.2 TRANSMITTER OVERVIEW (ATU), using an isolated RS485 serial link.
The transmitter operates at one fixed This ATU link allows the transmitter to
frequency in the LF/MF band (190 kHz to regulate antenna current, and therefore
535 kHz) and provides up to 500 W maintain constant field strength, by auto-
(VR500), 1,000 W (VR1000) or 2,000 W adjusting its output power in accordance
(VR2000) of continuous carrier power. It with the ATUs antenna current sample.
automatically transmits specific beacon
identification signals at pre-selected The transmitter circuitry can be
repetition rates. Special codes may also be represented using five functional blocks
transmitted when commanded from an (see Figure 6-1):
external source. Provision is made for local
or remote operation of the transmitter as x Ac Distribution
well as antenna fine-tuning through x Dc Distribution (optional)
controls on the transmitter's front panel. If x Exciter Control/Monitor
the standby option is purchased, provision x RF Power Block
is made for automatic changeover from the x RF Combiner/Power Probe.
selected main side of the transmitter to the
standby side when the selected main side's 6.3 AC DISTRIBUTION
critical parameters are not met. The The transmitter’s ac distribution is primarily
transmitter operates from a single phase, performed by ac power distribution
170 V to 270 V ac, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, using assembly A8 (see Figure SD-30). It
switch mode power supplies. A 144 V dc distributes ac voltage to the exciter
input option can be purchased for RF control/monitor and RF power blocks. The
output power requirements of less than ac input is applied through the line filter U1.
1000 W. Emission is continuous carrier The ac power that is distributed to the
(NON) beacon keyed identification tone exciter then passes though a toroidal
(A2A) and beacon with voice (A2A/A3A). transformer to allow ac to be isolated for
exciters A (J1) and B (J2). The ac voltage
for the RF power block (s) (J3-J10) is
applied directly from line filter U1. Relay K1
controls the application of ac voltage to the
RF power blocks.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-1

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
When ac is being applied to the exciter 6.4.1.3 B+ Voltage
control/monitor block and it is safe to The secondaries of step-up transformer
enable the RF output, the Ac Enable input T1 are rectified by diodes CR9, CR10,
(J11-3) is active (0 V), energizing K1 and CR11, CR13, CR14, and CR15 and
providing ac power to the RF power blocks. combine to form the high level B+ voltage.
Individual fusing is provided on all ac lines. This voltage is applied to the Dc Output
Thermistors RT1 through RT8 limit the (J2-1). Samples of the B+ voltage and
inrush current to the RF power block. current are applied to inputs of current
Chokes L1 through L8 improve the power mode PWM controller U8, which provides
factor on the ac lines applied to the RF PWM switching information to regulate the
power block, the battery charger and the B+ voltage.
spare output.
6.4.1.4 Inhibit PWM
6.4 DC DISTRIBUTION (Optional) When an RF power module fault occurs or
The transmitter’s dc distribution is primarily one of the dc distribution assembly’s
performed by dc power distribution cooling fans fails, a Dc Inhibit signal is
assembly A7 (see Figure SD-28). It provided to E1. Opto-coupler U1 will turn
distributes dc voltages to the exciter off and apply a signal to current mode
control/monitor and RF power blocks. The PWM controller U8 to inhibit the switching
dc input (between 128 V and 168 V) is signal output of FET driver U3.
applied to TB1. The dc control/monitor
PWB (A7A1) monitors the battery voltage, 6.5 EXCITER CONTROL/MONITOR
battery current, and charger current. The See Figure 6-2. In dual configuration the
assembly also contains battery boost exciter control/monitor stage contains two
PWBs (A2 and A3, if used) that converts independent exciter sections (A and B)
the input to 350 V. Relay K1 controls the which can be supplied in a single or a
application of dc voltages to the RF power main/standby configuration. In a main/
blocks. All dc lines are individually fused. standby configuration, the exciter can be
selected automatically or manually by local
6.4.1 Battery Boost PWB or remote control. Each exciter section
See Figure SD-29. The battery boost consists of an RF synthesizer PWB,
PWB (A2 and A3, if used) converts the interphase PDM driver PWB, exciter
128-168 V dc input voltage to the B+ monitor/generator PWB, ac/dc power
voltage used by the modulator. supply and an LVPS buck converter PWB.
The exciter control/monitor stage also
6.4.1.1 Dc Input contains the control/display PWB which
The dc input voltage is applied across contains the transmitter’s embedded
capacitor C17. DC lamp DS1 provides a microcontroller. The remote interface PWB,
status indication of the dc voltage. graphic user interface (GUI), analog/digital
displays and audio speaker are also
6.4.1.2 Switching Signal contained here. An NDB site interface
IC U3 is a high current FET driver that PWB can also be added to the exciter
provides a switching PWM signal (0-18 V) control/monitor stage.
to the primary of transformer T2. The
secondaries of T2 control the on/off status
of FETs Q1 and Q2, which in turn switch
the rectified ac voltage to the primary of
step-up transformer T1.

Page 6-2 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 BATTERY BOOST B+ (OPTIONAL) RF OUTPUT FINAL RF OUTPUT TO ATU

BATTERY DC CONTROL/MONITOR INT SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR

BATTERY SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION RF POWER
CHARGER CURRENT (OPTIONAL) 24VDC 24VDC(A), RF DRIVE(A), PDM(A) BLOCK
(OPTIONAL)
24VDC(B), RF DRIVE(B), PDM(B) RF COMBINER/
BATTERY (OPTIONAL)
POWER PROBE
* RF COMBINER
USED ONLY IF MORE
INT SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR THAN 1 RF POWER
BLOCK IS INSTALLED
MODEM VDC 24VDC(A), RF DRIVE(A), PDM(A)
(OPTIONAL) EXCITER/CONTROL/
PTSN
* INSTALLED IN EXCITER/ MONITOR 24VDC(B), RF DRIVE(B), PDM(B)
CONTROL/MONITOR
BLOCK
RF OUTPUT

RS232 EXT SERIAL LINK RF POWER

BLOCK
RS-232/RS-422
EXT SERIAL LINK (OPTIONAL)

NDB SITE
INTERFACE RS-485 INT SERIAL LINK
(OPTIONAL)
INT SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR
* INSTALLED IN EXCITER/
CONTROL/MONITOR VDC 24VDC(A), RF DRIVE(A), PDM(A)
BLOCK
EXTERNAL CONTROL/MONITOR 24VDC(B), RF DRIVE(B), PDM(B)

RF OUTPUT
EXTERNAL AUDIO INPUT
RF POWER
RS485 ISOLATED INTERNAL BLOCK
SERIAL LINK (ATU)
(OPTIONAL)

RS-485 ISOLATED INT SERIAL LINK

TO ATU
ATU VDC (OPTIONAL)
INT SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR

24VDC(A), RF DRIVE(A), PDM(A)

24VDC(B), RF DRIVE(B), PDM(B)

RF OUTPUT

RF POWER
BLOCK
(OPTIONAL)
AC POWER

AC POWER AC
DISTRIBUTION
FWD/REFLD POWER, RF VOLT MONITOR, RF CURRENT MONITOR

B1950021 VE
24VDC, AC RELAY CONTROL

Dimensions = mm (inches)

Block Diagram – Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter

Issue 2.0 Not to Scale Figure 6-1 Page 6-3 (6-4 Blank)
 6.5.1 Exciter Interface PWB close. The RF relay control FET (Q5), will
See Figures SD-10 and SD-11.The exciter select the standby position for the RF relay in
interface PWB (A2A2) provides signal the power block(s). U4:17, U4:21, U4:22, and
distribution, as well as the interconnection for U4:15 drive transistors Q1 through Q4 to
all the PWBs and assemblies in the exciter indicate to the control board information about
control/monitor stage. The RF drive failure the active side of the transmitter and the
detection, changeover/shutdown and monitor changeover/shutdown state. If a shutdown is
fail logic circuits are located on the exciter indicated, both K2 and K1 are opened so that
interface PWB. neither PDM driver has power.

6.5.1.1 RF Drive Circuitry and Failure 6.5.2 RF Synthesizer PWBs

Detection See Figures SD-17 and SD-18. The RF
U3:A, U3:B, U2:A, U2:B, and U2C and their synthesizer PWBs (A2A5 and, if installed,
associated components drive the RF signal to A2A9) use direct digital synthesis (DDS) to
the RF power blocks for side A. Q9 and its generate carrier frequencies within the
associated components provide a low when LF/MF broadcast band (190 kHz to 535
the RF drive is present and a high when it is kHz). The output of a digital synthesizer
not present. integrated circuit with internal high-speed
12-bit digital-to-analog converter is low-pass
U3:C, U3:D, U1:A, U1:B, and U1C and their filtered to provide a sinusoidal continuous
associated components drive the RF signal to output. The sine wave is digitized and
the power blocks for side B. Q8 and its divided by a factor of four to obtain the
associated components provide a low when carrier frequency. The digitized sine wave is
the RF drive is present and a high when it is also divided by a factor of N to obtain a
not present. 2gPDM frequency that ultimately determines
the transmitter's pulse duration modulation
6.5.1.2 Changeover/Shutdown (PDM) frequency. The RF synthesizer PWB
U4, Q1 through Q7, K1 and K2 along with consists of a microprocessor, direct digital
their associated components allows for the synthesizer, low pass filter, digitizer, IPM
selection of the main side of the transmitter. If correction, balanced drive, and N divider.
the NDB A/B input is held low, the main side
will be B, otherwise it will be A. If no 6.5.2.1 MICROPROCESSOR
changeover or shutdown is indicated (U4 The microprocessor consists of an 87C51
inputs 3, 4, 6, and 7 are all high level), the integrated circuit (U4), which is clocked at
relay for the main side will be energized, the system oscillator frequency (10.0000
closing the contact and providing voltages to MHz). Firmware resides in U4's internal four
the main PDM driver. The relay for the kilobytes of EPROM memory. The
standby side will be open. The RF relay microprocessor generates control
control FET (Q5) selects the main position for information for the DDS circuit, generates
the RF relay in the RF power block(s). If a control information for the N divider circuit,
changeover is indicated by a low on either and provides the appropriate sequence and
U4:3 or U4:4, the relay for the main side will control signals to all power modules during
open and the relay for the standby side will transmitter tuning, where required by the
host transmitter.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-5

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
6.5.2.1.1 DDS Control Information 6.5.2.2 DIRECT DIGITAL SYNTHESIZER
The RF carrier frequency is set using five The direct digital synthesizer consists of
binary coded decimal (BCD) switches (S1 integrated circuit U5 (AD98525Q) and
through S5). When a current-sink-to-ground associated components. It generates a
is applied at the Reset DDS input, or during frequency of 4gC based on information
turn on, the microprocessor monitors these provided by microprocessor U4 (refer to
switches and outputs the appropriate 48-bit paragraph 6.5.2.1). Integrated circuit U5 is a
value to the DDS Frequency Tuning Word CMOS, numerically controlled oscillator with
#1 register. The 48-bit value is written in six a 48-bit phase accumulator and 12-bit
consecutive bytes to the DDS's six internal digital-to-analog converter (DAC). The
registers. The sclk signal is enabled on each phase accumulator, which is responsible for
write cycle. generating an output frequency, is presented
with a 48-bit value from the Frequency
Tuning Word 1 registers, whose contents
6.5.2.1.2 N Divider Control Information
determine the FTW as follows:
The 4gC/B frequency is divided by an 'N'
( DesiredOutputFrequencyx2 48 )
factor to provide 2gPDM output frequency
between 126 kHz and 134 kHz (when E3 is
FTW
set in LOW PDM mode) or between 245 kHz SYSCLK
and 276 kHz (when E3 is set in HIGH PDM
mode) (see formula below). The The 10 MHz clock input is coupled with U5's
microprocessor determines the value of N internal programmable reference clock
and outputs the information at pins 2, 3, 4, 5, multiplier. This results in a system clock of
6 and 7. The N divider circuit uses this 50 MHz (i.e., SYSCLK = 50 MHz).
information as the N dividing factor.
The 12-bit output from the phase
accumulator is input to the DAC, which
- for gPDM = 130 kHz (HIGH PDM position): outputs a stepped sine wave at 4gc. The 4gc
output is then low-pass filtered to remove
gC and gPDM are expressed in kHz high frequency components.

4g C 6.5.2.3 LOW PASS FILTER

2g PDM
ª 2g C  65 º A low-pass filter consisting of C21, L1, and
int « » C23 removes the high frequency images
¬ 130 ¼ present in the DDS output signal. The output
is a sine wave at a frequency of 4gC.
6.5.2.1.3 RF Drive Tuning Control
U4 is a microprocessor integrated circuit 6.5.2.4 DIGITIZER
which monitors the status of control signals The output of the low-pass filter is connected
provided by the transmitter, where required. to a digitizer circuit consisting of transistor
It also provides control outputs that enable Q4, inverter U10:B, and associated
the RF drive tuning circuits and inhibit the components. Inverter U10:B outputs an
pulse duration modulation (PDM) while the approximate square wave at a frequency of
RF drive tuning is enabled. These inputs/ 4gC, which is applied to a y4 circuit and to
outputs are not applicable to Vector the N divider circuit.
transmitters.

Page 6-6 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 6.5.2.5 IPM CORRECTION 6.5.2.9 RF DRIVE SOURCE SELECTION
No applicable to Vector transmitters. The RF drive (gc) source is provided by the
integral numerically controlled oscillator or
6.5.2.6 WAVEFORM SYMMETRY an external RF generator. The position of
RF DRIVE SYMMETRY potentiometer R32 shorting shunt posts E1, E2 and E4
is adjusted for an RF drive output waveform, determine which source is selected. Vector
which is a symmetrical square wave (50% transmitters use the internal source.
duty cycle). The position of SYMMETRY
ADJ shorting jumper E6 determines when 6.5.2.9.1 Internal gc Source
the RF drive symmetry circuit is enabled or To use the integral numerically controlled
disabled. E6 should be installed in the oscillator’s output as the RF drive source,
ENABLE position (shorting pins 1 and 2) set the shorting shunt posts as follows:
when used in a Vector transmitter.
x E1 in INT position (pins 2 and 3 shorted)
6.5.2.7 BALANCED DRIVE x E2 in INT position (pins 2 and 3 shorted)
The balanced drive buffer is a switching x E4 in INT position (pins 2 and 3 shorted)
circuit that ensures the rise and fall times of
its output square wave are minimal. The gC 6.5.3 Interphase PDM Driver PWBs
signal is a 15 V peak-to-peak square wave See Figure SD-19. The interphase PDM
that is the low level RF drive signal for the driver PWBs (A2A6 and A2A10) produce a
RF power stage of the transmitter. pulse train of variable width as their PDM
output. The PDM repetition rate (gPDM) is a
6.5.2.7.1 Balanced Drive Matching fixed frequency normally between 130 kHz
Different values are possible on the and 133 kHz. The frequency is determined by
balanced drive output, depending on the the 2gPDM input, which is produced by the
transmitter’s requirements. The position of active exciter monitor/generator PWB. The
shorting shunt post E5 on 7-position header PDM drive signal, which determines the
XE5 can be changed to choose between transmitter output power level, is applied to
different capacitor and resistor values. E5 is the modulator assemblies in RF power
factory installed in the A position (shorting modules A or B (see Figure SD-24) contained
pins 1 and 2) for Vector transmitters. in the RF power block.

6.5.2.8 N DIVIDER 6.5.3.1 CARRIER LEVEL CONTROL

The N divider circuit is a cascade counter The carrier level control circuit consists of U6,
made up of U6, U7, and inverters U8:A and U7 U2A, U2D, U3B, U3D, U13A and their
U8:F. The 4gC/B signal is divided by N to associated components. U6 and U7 are
provide a 2gPDM frequency, which is between analog multipliers connected as a variable
126 kHz and 134 kHz (when E3 is set in gain, wide-band, linear amplifier. The
LOW PDM mode) or between 245 kHz and modulation reference (U6-X1) is multiplied by
276 kHz (when E3 is set in HIGH PDM a factor determined by the level of the carrier
mode). The value of N is supplied by ref (U6-Y1) and B+ sample (U7-X1) signals to
microprocessor U4 (see 6.5.2.1.2). The determine the gain and, in turn, the status of
2gPDM output, which is nominal 5 V pk-to-pk U7-Y1.
pulses, is applied to the transmitter's PDM
generation circuit, and ultimately determines When there is no Unbalanced Audio input at
the PDM frequency. P1-15, U2D's output (TP3), which is the
modulation reference, will be a nominal 1.4 V.
This voltage is applied as U6's X1 input.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-7

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
The Carrier Ref input at P1-2 is a dc voltage GAIN TRIM potentiometer R31 provides a
directly proportional to the square of the nominal 10% adjustment in the carrier level
expected RF carrier level. This voltage is ref output of U3B. In dual exciter applications,
applied to U6-Y1. it is adjusted to compensate for tolerance
differences in the PDM generators of exciters
The B+ Sample input at P1-3 is a dc voltage A and B. When it is set properly, the
directly proportional to the B+ voltage being transmitter's RF output is the same when
applied to the transmitter's RF power stage. either exciter is selected, provided the same
When the B+ voltage is 350 V, the B+ Carrier Ref is being applied.
Sample input and, in turn, the output of buffer
U3D (TP4), are a nominal 5.9 V. This voltage 6.5.3.2 PDM DIVIDER
is applied to U7-X1. The PDM divider circuit divides the 2gPDM
input frequency (P1-7) by two. The resulting
The gain of U6 and U7 and, in turn, the gPDM output (P1-10) is a 0 V to 15 V square
voltage at U7-Y1 is determined by the wave. Unless otherwise established during
following formula: the transmitter's manufacture, it should be a
fixed frequency, nominally 130 kHz.
Unbalanced Audio * Carrier Ref / B+ Ref
6.5.3.3 LINEAR INTEGRATOR
When the Carrier Ref input (U6-Y1) is 4.7 V The linear integrator circuit converts the gPDM
and the B+ Sample input (U7-X1) is 5.9 V (B+ square wave input to a triangular waveform.
voltage of 350 V), the gain of U6 is 0.80 for The triangular waveform has negative and
the dc reference applied to U6-X1. The positive voltage excursions of equal
U7-Y1 current is 0.80 times the U6-X1 amplitude and duration. The long R/C time
current. U3B is connected as a less than constant formed by C26/R10 ensures a linear
unity amplifier and its gain is summed with rise and fall time. Since the R/C time constant
U7's gain. The end result is the total voltage is fixed, the waveform amplitude varies over
gain of the circuit, relative to the voltage at the frequency range of gPDM. The charge/
the output of U2D (1.4 V), is a nominal 0.75 discharge time and waveform amplitude are
when GAIN TRIM potentiometer R31 is set to maximum at the lowest frequency.
the centre of its range. The output of U3B
(TP8) is 1.049 V (1.4 V x 0.75). 6.5.3.4 INTEGRATOR PEAK DETECTOR
The integrator peak detector circuit detects
The gain of U7 will change in direct proportion the positive going parts of the linear
to changes in the Carrier Ref voltage. If the integrator's triangular waveform. A portion of
Carrier Ref voltage is set to 0 V, or it is the resulting positive dc voltage (nominally
clamped to ground because Q1 is turned on, 1.8 V) at U2C’s output, is applied to the
U7's gain is minimum (zero). In turn, the dc inverting input of differential amplifier U3A.
reference's multiplication factor is minimum The carrier level ref output of U3A is offset by
(zero). The transmitter's RF output is turned this voltage, which is proportional to the
off. triangular waveform voltage peaks. This
offset effectively sets the carrier level ref’s
The gain of U7 will change in inverse zero power reference to the triangular
proportion to changes in the B+ Sample input. waveform's peak voltage. This ensures no RF
This feature eliminates the need for output is produced when the Carrier Ref input
sophisticated filtering of the transmitter's B+ (P1-2) is 0 V.
power supply and maintains the transmitter's
RF output at the original level for B+ voltage
variations of ±10%.

Page 6-8 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 +15VDC (A) INT SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR
FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER CONTROL/MONITOR 24VDC(A), RF DRIVE(A), PDM(A) TO RF POWER BLOCK
PWB
A RF DRIVE (A), 2FPDM (A) 24VDC(B), RF DRIVE(B), PDM(B)

2FPDM(A), +15VDC(A), CARRIER REF(A), KEYED TONE/EXT AUDIO(A)

INTERPHASE
PWM DRIVER CONTROL/MONITOR
PWB
A PDM (A)

+15VDC (B)
FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER CONTROL/MONITOR
PWB
B RF DRIVE (B), 2FPDM (B)

2FPDM(B), +15VDC(B), CARRIER REF(B), KEYED TONE/EXT AUDIO(B)

INTERPHASE
PWM DRIVER CONTROL/MONITOR
PWB
B PDM (B)

FROM AC DISTRIBUTION +24VDC, AC RELAY CONTROL

+24VDC CONTROL/MONITOR, INT SERIAL LINK

FROM DC DISTRIBUTION REMOTE EXCITER/ CONTROL/MONITOR
CONTROL/MONITOR INTERFACE KEYED TONE/EXT AUDIO (A) MONITOR
PWB GENERATOR +/-VDC
FROM RF POWER PROBE FWD/REFLD PWR, RF VOLT MONITOR, RF CURRENT MONITOR EXT AUDIO PWB A

EXT AUDIO INPUT EXCITER

USER INTERFACE INTERFACE
EXTERNAL CONTROL/MONITOR, EXT SERIAL LINK (RS232, RS422) PWB
EXCITER/ CONTROL/MONITOR
ANTENNA TUNING UNIT RS485 ISOLATED INT SERIAL LINK CONTROL/MONITOR, INT SERIAL LINK MONITOR
GENERATOR +/-VDC
KEYED TONE/EXT AUDIO (B) PWB B

LOCAL CONTROL CONTROL/MONITOR, EXT SERIAL LINK +/-VDC

CONTROL/MONITOR, INT SERIAL LINK

KEYED TONE/EXT AUDIO (A) & (B)

CARRIER REF (A) & (B)

CONTROL/
DISPLAY CONTROL/MONITOR, INT SERIAL LINK
PWB
+/-VDC

+24VDC
SPEAKER +24VDC (A)

ANALOG/ +/-VDC
AC/DC LVPS
DIGITAL POWER A
DISPLAY AC SAMPLE MONITOR
SUPPLY
A

+24VDC

+24VDC (B)

FROM AC DISTRIBUTION AC AC/DC +/-VDC

POWER LVPS
FROM DC DISTRIBUTION BATTERY (OPTIONAL) SUPPLY AC SAMPLE B MONITOR
B

ATU
POWER
SUPPLY +24VDC TO ANTENNA TUNING UNIT
B1950017 VD
FILTER

Dimensions = mm (inches)

Block Diagram – Exciter/Control/Monitor Stage

Issue 2.0 Not to Scale Figure 6-2 Page 6-9 (6-10 Blank)
 Carrier Reference
Level

Ramp

PDM 1

Figure 6-3 Timing Diagram for PDM Differential Amplifier

6.5.3.5 INTERPHASE PDM 6.5.3.5.1 PDM1 Generator

GENERATOR The PDM1 generator consists of U10B,
The interphase PDM generator consists of transistors Q4, Q5, and associated
two identical variable pulse duration components. The compensated carrier
generators (PDM1 and PDM2; PDM1 level ref input from the integrator peak
circuitry is described). The PDM1 detector circuit is applied to differential
generator produces a 0 V to 15 V amplifier U10B's non-inverting input,
rectangular waveform at the gPDM where it is compared to the triangular
repetition rate. The waveform on/off ratio waveform from the linear integrator circuit.
(duty cycle) is directly proportional to the When the compensated carrier level ref is
carrier level. The transmitter uses three B+ more positive than the triangular
voltage levels to maximize performance. waveform, U10B's output is open collector.
As the RF output power is increased from +15 V is applied through R60 and R62 to
0 W (B+ voltage is 150 V), the PDM duty the balanced drive formed by Q4/Q5. Q4
cycle increases proportionally. When the turns on and applies +15 V to K1-3 as the
RF output is increased so that the PDM PDM1 output (Q5 is off). For the rest of the
duty cycle reaches 45 %, the control/ triangular waveform's period, the
display PWB initiates a B+ voltage compensated carrier level ref is less
increase (to 250 V) and a PDM duty cycle positive than the triangular waveform.
decrease (to 27%). When the RF output is U10B's output is a current-sink-to -15 V
increased to a level where the PDM duty and Q4 turns off. Q5 turns on and clamps
cycle again reaches 45%, the control/ the PDM1 output to ground. The minimum
display PWB initiates a B+ voltage 'on time' (zero RF power) occurs at the
increase (to 350 V) and a PDM duty cycle negative peaks of the triangular waveform.
decrease (to 32%). See Figure 6-3 for a timing diagram.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-11

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
6.5.3.6 PDM FAULT DETECTOR disconnect the PDM 1 output from the
The PDM fault detector circuit contains a transmitter circuits when the PDM fault
voltage controlled switch that controls the detector output is a current-sink-to-ground
'set/'reset' status of the shutback latch (logic low). It also inhibits the PDM
circuit and, in turn, controls the on/off generator when relay K1 is de-energized
status of relay K1. or when a logic true inhibit PDM command
is applied to P1-16.
The PDM1 fault detector circuit consists of
U12A and its associated components. U9A/U9B form a bistable flip/flop. The flip-
R67/C58 form an integrator with a long flop's output (U9-3) will be 15 V (logic
time constant, relative to the PDM high) in its 'reset' state, and a current-sink-
frequency. C58's charge voltage is applied to-ground (logic low) in its 'set' state.
to U12A's inverting input and compared to
the 5 V reference voltage applied to its Normally the inhibit PDM input and the
non-inverting input from voltage divider output of the PDM fault detector circuit,
R70/R71/R72. U12A's output is an open which are the flip-flop's controlling inputs,
collector and has no influence when C58's are open collector. 5 V (logic high) is
charge voltage is less positive than the applied to U9-1 and U9-5 through their
reference voltage. U12A's output will pull-up resistors and the flip-flop is latched
switch to a current-sink-to-ground when in its 'reset' state. Relay K1 is held
C58's charge voltage goes more positive energized and the PDM output is applied
than the reference voltage. to the transmitter circuits.

During normal operation, C58 will charge If a PDM fault is sensed, the PDM fault
through R67 towards 15 V when the detector circuit applies a current-sink-to-
PDM1 output is 15 V ('on time') and CR3 ground (logic low) to U9-5 and causes the
is reversed biased. It will instantly flip-flop to switch to and latch in its 'set'
discharge to 0 V, through CR3, when the state. Relay K1 de-energizes and
PDM1 output switches to 0 V ('off time'). disconnects the PDM output from the
The repetition rate of the PDM1 on/off transmitter circuits. The PDM latch output
periods ensures the charge on C58 will not (J1-11) is activated (5 V). This condition is
exceed 5 V, provided each PDM1 cycle maintained until the flip-flop is reset by the
contains an 'off time'. If a PDM failure removal of the logic low from U9-5 (no
occurs such that it produces a continuous PDM fault) and the application of logic low
'on time', C58 will charge more positively to U9-1 (a logic true current-sink-to-ground
than 5 V. U12A's output will switch to a reset PDM command is applied to J1-1).
current-sink-to-ground and toggle the
shutback latch circuit to its 'set' state. 6.5.3.8 PDM INHIBIT
The PDM inhibit circuit consists of U9D,
6.5.3.7 SHUTBACK LATCH transistor Q2, and their associated circuits.
The shutback latch circuit inhibits the 'on Its function is to instantly clamp the output
time' of the PDM output and, in turn, the of the PDM generator to ground (zero
RF output of the transmitter whenever a carrier level) when a logic true (current-
transmitter originated Inhibit PDM (P1-16) sink-to-ground) inhibit PDM input is
command is applied. This circuit provides applied to P1-16, or when the PDM fault
additional protection to the transmitter's detector circuit senses a PDM fault and
RF power stages when faults are detected the shutback latch circuit’s flip-flop is
or actions are initiated that may cause RF latched in its ‘set’ state. When neither of
stress current thresholds to be exceeded. these conditions are true, the PDM inhibit
Its function is to de-energize K1 and circuit has no influence.

Page 6-12 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 6.5.4 Ac/Dc Universal Input 6.5.5.2 AC SAMPLE
Power Supplies The ac supply voltage is applied to the
See Figures SD-3 and SD-4. The ac/dc primary of sample transformer T1. Diodes
universal input power supplies [A2U2 CR8 and CR18, capacitor C5, and
(exciter A) and A2U3 (exciter B, if used)] resistors R5, R6, and R11 provide a half-
are 150 W, universal input, 24 V output wave rectified, attenuated sample of the
power supplies. The transmitter’s ac input ac signal at J2-29 and J2-30. This sample
is applied to A2J6 and A2J7 and the is used by the transmitter for control and
regulated 24.8 V is provided on the display purposes.
output. The 24.8 V output is applied
through the exciter interface PWB to the 6.5.5.3 LVPS FAILURE DETECTOR
dc input source for the LVPS buck The half-wave rectified ac signal is also
converter PWBs and provides the 24 V dc applied to an LVPS failure detection
supply for the remaining functional blocks circuit. This circuit consists of
of the transmitter. An Ac Sense signal is comparators U1A and U1B, opto-coupler
applied from the ac input source, via the U2, and associated components. Zener
LVPS buck converter, to the remote diodes CR15 and CR16 regulate the ac
interface PWB as an aid in determining if signal to 9.4 V, which is used to apply a
the ac input source is at an acceptable high limit reference voltage (3.1 V) to
level. U1A’s negative input and a low limit
reference voltage (1.9 V) to U1B’s
6.5.5 LVPS Buck Converter PWBs positive input. Each of the low voltage
See Figure SD-20. The LVPS buck power supplies are scaled and applied to
converter PWBs [A2A7 (exciter A) and both the high and low limit detectors. If
A2A11 (exciter B, if used)] accept the 24 any low voltage supply increases or
V supply from the power supply decrease beyond acceptable limits, the
assemblies and provide regulated r 15 V output of the associated detector will
and r 5 V supplies for the exciter/ switch to an open collector. Opto-coupler
control/monitor stage and the remaining U2 will turn on and apply a ground
functional blocks of the transmitter. potential (0.0 V) to the LVPS Fail output
for that PWB.
6.5.5.1 DC-DC CONVERTER
Q1 and Q2 are fixed frequency power
switching regulators. Their PWM signal
outputs determine the output voltage. Q1
generates the r15 V supplies and Q2
generates the r5 V supplies. Feedback
applied to pin 1 of each device adjusts the
pulse width to regulate the output voltage.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-13

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
6.5.6 Exciter Monitor/Generator 6.5.6.2 Press-To-Talk
PWBs The input to U11:11 indicates to the Exciter
See Figures SD-21 and SD-22. The exciter/ Monitor/Generator PWB which mode of
monitor/generator PWBs [A2A8 (exciter A) operation it should be operating in. It will
and A2A12 (exciter B, if used)] perform the react by adjusting the U16:1 that controls the
following functions: MUX U1:X.

x Use the press-to-talk input to select 6.5.6.3 Modulation Depth Functions

between beacon and voice modes. Modulation depth of the beacon, voice and
beacon, and voice are controlled using the
x Monitor and control modulation depth digital pots 1, 2 and 3 of U10 respectively.
The levels of the pots in U10 are adjusted by
x Selects the parameter, RF current or RF the microcontroller U11 over the SPI bus.
voltage, to be applied to the remote
interface PWB for external monitoring. A selection between RF Monitor Voltage and
RF Monitor Current samples is made using
x Generate the appropriate tone frequency the MUX U14:C. CR9, U9:B and their
associated components RF detect the
x Monitors tone and keyer operation selected RF monitor signal. The RF monitor
signal is then used to calculate the
x Monitors the forward power and controls modulation depth. The microcontroller (U11)
changeover and inhibit functions. compares the average and peak levels of
the RF signal. The average value is detected
6.5.6.1 MICROCONTROLLER using U9:A and its associated components.
Microcontroller U11 uses the SPI bus to The level is detected using U9:C, CR7, and
communicate with shift register U16 which their associated components.
shifts out digital data used to control various
signals including changeover, shutdown, RF 6.5.6.4 Tone Generation
off, and alarm. Watchdog timer IC U2 and The keyer tone is generated using the DDS
associated components generate an Monitor IC U5. The microcontroller U11 sends an
Fault (P1-10) if the microcontroller falls into SPI signal to U5 indicating the frequency of
an unknown state. the tone to generate. The tone is then
amplified using U8:C and its associated
The clock for the microcontroller and the tone components. The microcontroller (U11) then
oscillator is generated using Y1, U4:E and the controls keying by toggling the MUX U1:Z.
associated components.
Correct operation of the keyer is monitored
The microcontroller (U11) continually by U8:A, U8:B, CR11, and CR12 and there
monitors its internal Flash and EEPROM associated components. The analog
memory using checksums. If for some samples at U11:27 and U11:28 are
reason, the checksum returns as invalid, the compared to the low threshold levels (set up
microcontroller will detect the error and raise using the GUI) to determine if the keying
a flag, resulting in the output power being gate is opened or closed. If at any time the
inhibit. U2 acts as a watchdog timer, if the keying gate is opened when it should be
watchdog times out, the monitor fault will also closed or closed when it should be opened,
be raised, causing the output power to be and alarm is flagged and output power is
inhibited. This will guarantee that the U11 is inhibited.
always operating as intended.

Page 6-14 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 6.5.6.5 Forward Power Monitor x Selects the exciter (A or B) that will
A dc voltage, proportional to the transmitter’s provide the RF drive and PDM drive to
forward power, is applied to the Forward the RF power stage’s RF amplifiers.
Power Sample input (P1-1). This voltage is
filtered by operational amplifier U9 and x Selects the transmitter side (A or B) that
associated components and applied to will be ‘on air’. This redundancy is built in
U11’s internal ADC. If the forward power to the exciter, which provides the RF
sample is above or below user-defined limits drive and PDM drive, and the RF power
for a user-defined time period, the blocks, which provide the amplified RF
Changeover output (J4-5) becomes active outputs to the RF combiner/probe.
(logic low). If a changeover had already
occurred prior to this occurrence, a x Determines on/off status of RF power
Shutdown output (J4-6) will also be stage.
generated. All user-defined parameters are
established using the front panel GUI and x Interfaces with the diagnostic display.
applied to the exciter monitor/generator
PWB via the internal serial bus. 6.5.7.1 CARRIER REFERENCE VOLTAGE
The Carrier Ref (A) (J7-38) and (B) (J7-40)
6.5.6.6 RF MONITOR PARAMETER outputs are applied to the interphase PDM
SELECTION driver PWB of each exciter to generate the
Multiplexer U14 and associated components PDM drive pulse that ultimately controls the
allows the user to select the parameter (RF RF output of the transmitter. DACs U31 and
voltage or RF current) to be applied to the U32, in conjunction with microcontroller U22,
RF MONITOR output at the rear of the establish a dc reference voltage for the
exciter. Carrier Ref outputs. The voltage is buffered
through operational amplifiers U27B, U28B
6.5.7 Control/Display PWB and associated components.
See Figures SD-6 through SD-9. The control/
display PWB (A2A1) performs the following 6.5.7.2 ALARM THRESHOLD CIRCUITS
functions: Certain parameters that are monitored by the
control/display PWB can initiate an alarm
x Produces dc voltage Carrier Ref (A) and indication and appropriate transmitter control
(B) outputs that ultimately determine the if an out of tolerance condition occurs.
forward power (RF carrier) level of the RF
output. These voltages are the reference 6.5.7.2.1 Ac Supply Voltage
voltages for the variable pulse duration The Ac Power input (J4-21) is an
modulation (PDM) generator in each unregulated dc voltage that is proportional to
exciter (A and B). the ac source. The input is filtered and
compared to the low ac ref fault threshold on
x Monitors critical parameters and causes operational amplifier U4C. If the Ac Power
the Carrier Ref voltage to turn off voltage is below this threshold, the ac low
(shutback) or reduce (cutback) when signals switch to 0 V. The Carrier Ref (A)
defined fault threshold limits are and (B) outputs clamp to 0 V and the
exceeded. Shutback (A) (J7 1) and (B) (J7-2) outputs
switch to 0 V and inhibit the exciter’s
x Identifies out-of-tolerance parameters modulator drive. The transmitter's RF output
when the carrier level is shut back or cut turns off (shuts back) and remains off until
back by providing a visual indication for the ac power returns to an acceptable
local monitoring or an electrical status voltage. The system diagram’s AC Mains
output for remote monitoring. lamp displays a fault condition. An Ac
Sample signal is applied to ADC U9 for
application to the diagnostic display.
Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-15
Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
6.5.7.2.2 Reflected Power Monitor 6.5.7.3 SAMPLE MONITORING CIRCUITS
The Refld Pwr Sample input (J1-5) is a dc In addition to the parameters described in
voltage that is proportional to the reflected paragraph 6.5.7.2, various parameters are
power at the transmitter's output. The input is applied to the control/display PWB for local
filtered and buffered by operational amplifier (via the front panel’s diagnostic display) and
U1B and associated components, and then external (via the remote interface PWB)
applied to the remote interface PWB via the monitoring. In some cases, these parameters
external serial interface (microcontroller U22). have associated alarm detection circuitry, but
The signal is also compared to a pre- it is not resident on the control/display PWB.
determined refld pwr shtbk ref fault threshold
on operational amplifier U4A. When the 6.5.7.3.1 B+ Sample
reflected power indicates a VSWR of greater The B+ Sample (J4-35) circuit is not used.
than 2:1, relative to rated forward power, the
refld pwr sample input exceeds the fault 6.5.7.3.2 PDM Drive
threshold and the refld_pwr_shutback signal The PDM (A) (J4-9) and PDM (B) (J4-7)
switches to 5 V. The Carrier Ref (A) and (B) inputs are pulses which represent the PDM
outputs clamp to 0 V and the Shutback (A) signal applied to sides A and B of each RF
(J7-1) and (B) (J7-2) outputs switch to 0 V power block. The inputs are filtered through
and inhibit the exciter’s modulator drive. A operational amplifiers U7B and U11B and
clock pulse is also applied to an alarm count/ associated components. PDM (A) Sample
cutback circuit in complex programmable and PDM (B) Sample signals are applied to
logic device (CPLD) U18. The RF output is ADC U9 for application to the front panel’s
instantly shut back (turn off). The system diagnostic display.
diagram’s Output Network lamp displays a
fault condition. A Refld Pwr Sample signal is 6.5.7.3.3 Dc Current
applied to ADC U9 for application to the front The Dc Current Sample (J4-33) circuit is not
panel’s diagnostic display. used.

Turning off the RF output reduces the refld 6.5.7.3.4 PA Voltage

pwr sample input to 0 V. The Carrier Ref (A) The PA Volts Sample (J4-31) circuit is not
and (B) outputs are restored to their used.
pre-shutback levels, the Shutback A and B
outputs return to open collector, and the RF 6.5.7.3.5 Forward Power
output is restored at an exponential rate. If The Fwd Pwr Sample input (J1-3) is a dc
the fault threshold is exceeded before the voltage which represents the forward power at
pre-set power level is reached, the shutback the transmitter’s RF output. The input is filtered
cycle is repeated. If two or more shutback through operational amplifier U2D and
cycle clock pulses are applied within any two associated components. A fwd_pwr_sample
second period, the Carrier Ref outputs are cut signal is applied to ADC U9 for application to
back (reduced) until the carrier level is cut the front panel’s diagnostic display. The
back to a level that results in an acceptable fwd_pwr_sample input is also applied to the
reflected power. When the transmitter enters remote interface PWB via the external serial
cutback mode, the system diagram’s Output interface (microcontroller U22). The Fwd Pwr
Network lamp flashes on and off. When the Sample input is also low-pass filtered through
refld pwr sample input returns to or is operational amplifier U2C and associated
maintained at a level which is less than the components. A speaker_ref_level signal is
fault threshold, the Shutback outputs returns applied through DAC U32. The analog output
to open collector but the system diagram’s (pin 12) is filtered through operational amplifier
Output Network lamp continues to display a U28D and associated components and applied
fault as a maintenance aid. The lamp remains to the Audio (Speaker) output (J11-1), then
on until reset by the diagnostic display menu. applied to speaker LS1 for audio monitoring.

Page 6-16 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 6.5.7.3.6 Battery Voltage 6.5.7.5 CPLD
The Battery Voltage input (J1-27) is a dc Complex programmable logic device (CPLD)
voltage which represents the voltage applied U18 continuously reads digital inputs for all
from the transmitter’s optional battery supply. transmitter alarm events. It is programmed to
The input is filtered through operational perform root cause detection of a fault as well
amplifier U3B and associated components. as high-speed fault protection. Depending on
The bat_volt_sample signal is applied to ADC the nature of the fault, the CPLD generates
U12 for application to the front panel’s transmitter Shutback outputs (J7-1 and J7-2)
diagnostic display. or various digital control/inhibit signals via a
parallel data bus.
6.5.7.3.7 Battery Current
The Battery Current input (J1-25) is a dc 6.5.8 Remote Interface PWB
voltage which represents the current drawn See Figures SD-12 through SD-14. The
by the transmitter’s optional battery supply. remote interface PWB (A2A2) performs the
The input is filtered through operational following functions:
amplifier U3A and associated components.
The bat_cur_sample signal is applied to ADC x Buffers all external transmitter remote
U12 for application to the front panel’s control inputs and provides the
diagnostic display. connection for the system’s external
interlock circuit
6.5.7.3.8 Low Voltage Power Supplies
Attenuated, buffered samples of all low x Provides RF filtering for RF power probe
voltage dc power supplies (+24 V, r 15 V and samples (forward power, reflected
+ 5 V) are applied to ADCs U9 and U12 for power, and RF current)
application to the front panel’s diagnostic
display. x Provides an isolated ATU serial interface

6.5.7.3.9 Cabinet Temperature x Converts external serial levels from TTL

Low voltage temperature sensor U5 provides to RS232 and RS422
a dc voltage (between 0 and 5 V) which
represents the ambient cabinet temperature. x RF monitor conditioning
This voltage is buffered by operational
amplifier U8A and associated components x Press-to-talk input
and applied to ADC U12 for application to the
front panel’s diagnostic display. x Audio conditioning

6.5.7.3.10 +48 V Sample x Audio monitoring

The +48 V Sample (J4-29) circuit is not used.
x Provides distribution and interface point
6.5.7.3.11 Polarity Error between the ac/dc distribution stages and
The Polarity Error (J1-23) circuit is not used. exciter control/monitor stage

6.5.7.4 MICROCONTROLLER 6.5.8.1 Remote Inputs/Outputs

Microcontroller IC U22 interfaces between the U7:A and associated components form the
diagnostic display and its associated soft- circuitry to allow remote control of RF on/off
keys. It controls the level of the Carrier Ref when in local mode. U21:C and associated
signals (see paragraph 6.5.6.1), which components form the circuitry to control the
ultimately determines the forward power level external interlock. If the link between TB1-19
of the transmitter. It also acts as an internal and TB2-20 is open, U21:C will output a high
and external serial interface for transmitter (external interlock), causing the transmitter to
alarm and status signals. inhibit RF power.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-17

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
6.5.8.2 Isolated ATU Serial Interface 6.5.8.6.2 Audio Filtering
U11, U13, U14, U15, and U17 provide U8:B, U8:C, U8:D and their associated
isolation to the internal serial bus (RS485) to components forms the audio input filter. This
allow for ATU control. The ATU provides 5 V filter, along with the poles located on the
to opto-isolators U13 and U14, which provide Exciter Interface PWB and the Modulator
isolation between differential transceivers Filter, is a band pass filter passing signals
U11 and U17. The ATU controls the DE/RE from 300 to 3000 Hz.
signal using J3-5, allowing the ATU to specify
direction of transmission through the isolated 6.5.8.6.3 Audio Limiting
link preventing collisions over the serial bus. U10:B, U10:C, U10:D, Q7, and their
associated components form the audio
6.5.8.3 RS232 and RS422 Interface limiter. The limiter will raise an alarm at
U19, U18, U12, convert the TTL levels U10:13 when the audio signal goes above a
produced by the control/display PWB to pre-defined threshold. It will then compress
RS232 and RS422 levels for external the audio signal by adjusting the resistance
control/monitoring of the transmitter. across the JFET Q7. This is accomplished by
adjusting the JFET’s base voltage at the
6.5.8.4 RF Monitor Conditioning output of the comparators U10:B and U10:C.
Operational amplifier U23, MONITOR LEVEL
potentiometer R164 and associated 6.5.8.7 Audio Monitor
components allow the user to adjust the RF U1:B and T1 condition the forward power
monitor level. sample signal to produce an audio monitor
signal that can be used to view the modulated
6.5.8.5 Press-To-Talk Input signal being output by the transmitter.
Link E4 allows for the selection of phantom
feed or normal press-to-talk operation. When 6.5.9 Front Panel Metering
in position A, normal operation is selected The front panel of the exciter control/monitor
and grounding TB1-12 indicates press-to-talk assembly provides local controls and a
mode. When in position B, phantom feed graphic user interface to display operating
mode is selected and applying -15 V to the status, root cause fault detection, RF power,
shield (TB1-15) will indicate press-to-talk and critical dc voltage/current levels. The
mode. controller/display PWB is mounted on the
rear of the panel. The front panel is divided
6.5.8.6 Audio Conditioning into three sections – system diagram,
The audio conditioning circuitry on the remote diagnostic display and control.
interface board consists of three parts,
balanced conditioning, audio filtering, and the 6.5.9.1 SYSTEM DIAGRAM
audio limiting. The system diagram is a functional flow
diagram of the transmitter. Each section of
6.5.8.6.1 Balanced Conditioning the flow diagram contains an alarm lamp,
U3:A and its associated components convert which turns on when a fault occurs in that
the balance audio signal between TB1-14 section. If a lamp is flashing, the transmitter
and TB1-16 to an unbalanced signal. The has entered a cutback (reduced power) mode
level of the audio signal is adjusted using of operation. The lamp that is flashing is likely
AUDIO LEVEL potentiometer R37. the cause for the cutback.

Page 6-18 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 6.5.9.2 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY 6.5.10 NDB Site Interface PWB
The diagnostic display is a graphic user (Optional)
interface (GUI) screen that is navigated using See Figures SD-15 and 16. The NDB site
five associated soft-keys. The majority of the interface PWB (A4), if purchased, provides:
transmitter’s local control (exciter selection,
power level, etc.) and monitoring (critical x 16 optically isolated monitor inputs.
parameter levels, alarm events, etc.) may be
performed from menus on this display. An x 16 form C contact relay closure control
analog meter is provided, which can display points.
forward power, reflected power, modulation
percentage or antenna current. 6.5.10.1 Site Monitor Points
RFI filtering is provided on all control input
6.5.9.3 CONTROL SWITCHES lines to ensure transmitter operation is not
The control switches determine the interrupted due to RF pick-up on control lines.
transmitter’s control location (local or remote) Opto-couplers buffer/isolate the external
and its RF status (on or off). circuits and prevent unwanted transients
from affecting transmitter operation. All
6.5.9.3.1 Local/Remote Selection isolated inputs are driven by isolated dc to
When Local is selected, all remote control dc converter U1 to prevent unwanted
functions, except RF off, are disabled and transients from affecting the transmitter’s dc
have no influence on the transmitter's supplies. The monitor inputs are shifted in
operating status or pre-set RF power levels. through shift registers U6 and U9. These
When Remote is selected, all front panel values are then relayed to the control/display
control functions, except RF Off, are disabled PWB over the internal serial bus using
and have no influence on the transmitter's RS485 transceiver U12.
operating status or pre-set RF power levels.
6.5.10.2 Site Control Points
6.5.9.3.2 RF On/RF Off Selection Shift registers U17 and U19, controlled by
When RF On is selected (enabled in Local microcontroller U13 over the SPI bus will
mode only), the transmitter’s RF power stage control relays K1 to K16. Control point logic
is enabled to provide an RF output. When RF levels are determined by the control/display
Off is selected (enabled in Local and PWB and are communicated to the NDB site
Remote modes), the transmitter’s RF power interface PWB over the internal serial bus.
stage is inhibited.
6.5.11 Modem (Optional)
6.5.9.3.3 Power Increase/Decrease See Figure SD-3. An optional modem can be
When Power Increase is pressed (enabled in provided to interface the transmitter’s RS232
Local mode only), the transmitter’s RF output Ext Serial Link to a PTSN. The link provides
power is increased. When Power Decrease remote monitoring and status for the
is pressed (enabled in Local mode only), the transmitter.
transmitter’s RF output power is decreased.
Additionally, if both the Power Increase and 6.5.12 Dc-Dc Power Supply PWB
Power Decrease switches are depressed See Figure SD-3. The dc-dc power supply
simultaneously, the transmitter’s RF output PWB (A13) contains voltage regulators (U1
power will be reduced to 0 W. and U2) that provide 9 V for the optional
modem (via P7) and 24 V (limited to 1A) for
the ATU (via TB1).

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-19

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
6.6 RF POWER BLOCK 6.6.1.1.2 Switching Signal
See Figures 6-4 and SD-23. Depending on IC U3 is a high current FET driver that
the rated power level, there are between one provides a switching PWM signal (0-18 V) to
and four identical RF power blocks (A3 the primary of transformer T2. The
through A6) installed in the transmitter. Each secondaries of T2 control the on/off status of
RF power block contains one (single FETs Q1 and Q2, which in turn switch the
configuration) or two (main/standby rectified ac voltage to the primary of step-up
configuration) ‘hot serviceable’ RF power transformer T1/T4.
modules (A and B). The RF filter and power
block distribution PWB are also contained in 6.6.1.1.3 B+ Voltage
the RF power block. The secondaries of step-up transformer
T1/T4 are rectified by diodes CR9, CR10,
6.6.1 RF Power Modules CR11, CR13, CR14, and CR15 and combine
See Figures 6-5 and SD-24. Each RF power to form the high level B+ voltage. This
module (A1 and A2 of each RF power block) voltage is applied through choke L2 to the dc
contributes up to 500 W RF carrier power to output (J2-1). Samples of the B+ voltage
the transmitter's RF output and contains a and current are applied to inputs of current
wideband power amplifier, a modulator, and mode PWM controller U8, which provides
a modulator filter. A switch mode power PWM switching information to regulate the
supply PWB is provided to convert the ac B+ voltage. FETs Q4, Q5 and resistors R10,
input voltage to the high level B+ voltage R11, R24 and R25, in conjunction with opto-
used by the modulator assembly. Each RF couplers U4 and U6, provide a means to
power module’s output is connected to RF adjust the attenuated voltage applied to U8,
relay K1, which determines the ‘on-air’ thereby adjusting the level of the B+ voltage.
module’. The ‘on-air’ module’s RF output is
impedance-transformed by RF transformer 6.6.1.1.4 Inhibit PWM
PWB A6 and applied to RF filter PWB. The When an RF power module fault occurs, an
RF power module outputs are applied to the Inhibit signal is provided to J1-7. Opto-coupler
RF combiner/probe. A power module U7 will turn off and apply a signal to current
control/interface PWB is provided to mode PWM controller U8 to inhibit the
interface control/monitor signals between the switching signal output of FET driver U3.
RF power modules and the exciter/control/
monitor stage as required. Cooling air is 6.6.1.2 POWER MODULE CONTROL/
provided by fans B1 and B2. INTERFACE PWB
See Figure SD-25. With the exception of the
6.6.1.1 SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY B+ input to the modulator and the RF output
PWB of the module, the power module control/
See Figure SD-26. The switch mode power interface PWB (A1) provides the input and
supply PWB (A2) converts the transmitter’s output connections for the RF power module.
170-270 V ac input voltage to the B+ voltage The power module control/interface PWB
(150, 250, or 350 V) used by the modulator. performs the following functions:

6.6.1.1.1 Rectifier 6.6.1.2.1 Module Status

The ac input voltage is rectified by diodes RF power module status such as B+
U1 and U2, providing a dc voltage across voltage, PA voltage, dc current, and
capacitors C12 through C17. Varistors RV1 temperature are measured using ADC inputs
through RV3 provide protection from high on the microcontroller U2. Information about
voltage transients. AC IND lamp DS1 the Fan Tachs is also captured using
provides a status indication of the ac voltage interrupt 0 and interrupt 1 inputs on U2. All
on the RF power module. information is transmitted to the control/
display PWB using the internal serial bus.

Page 6-20 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 6.6.1.2.2 Gate Bias Drive Signal 6.6.1.3.3 B+ Switching MOSFET
U2, Q1 and associated components Power MOSFET Q1 is connected to switch
generate a 15 V square wave at 263 kHz to the B+ voltage at the on/off ratio of the PDM
drive the gate bias drive in the modulator. data on U1's HO output, which is applied to its
gate. The resultant PDM (B+) output contains
6.6.1.2.3 Switch Mode Supply Control the PDM data applied to J2-7 at a high (0-B+)
Decodes the serial control (B+ settings) from logic level. Free-wheeling diode CR6
the control/display PWB and outputs the prevents negative overshoot by providing
settings using darlington transistor U4. current flow when MOSFET Q1 is off.

6.6.1.3 MODULATOR 6.6.1.4 MODULATOR FILTER PWB

See Figure SD-24. The modulator (A5) is a See Figure SD-24. The modulator filter PWB
logic level converter that converts the low (A4) consists of inductors L1 and L2 and
level (0 to 15 V) logic of the PDM input to a capacitors C1 and C3 as well as C2 of the
high level (0-B+) logic PDM (B+) output. power amplifier. These components form a
low pass filter designed to pass the audio
6.6.1.3.1 13 V Power Supply components but reject the PDM frequency.
The 15 V LO output (pin 1) of FET driver U1 When no modulating audio information is
is full-wave rectified by bridge rectifier CR1 present, the PA Volts output will be a dc
through CR4, at the PDM frequency. The voltage equal to the modulator input voltage
resultant dc voltage is filtered by capacitor multiplied by the duty cycle of the PDM (B+)
C7 and limited to 13 V by zener diode CR5. signal. Capacitor C3 in conjunction with L2 is
The power supply's less positive output is resonant at a frequency to provide optimal
referenced to the source terminal of power rejection of the PDM frequency.
FET Q1 via resistor R7. Therefore, the
positive output is always 13 V higher than 6.6.1.5 POWER AMPLIFIER
the voltage on the FET source terminal. The See Figure SD-24. The power amplifier (A3)
13 V output is applied to U1’s VB (+) and VS uses two parallel-connected pairs of
(-) inputs as the switched gate drive for the MOSFETs (Q1 through Q4) to produce an
FETs. Transformer T1 provides isolation unfiltered, modulated RF output. The
between the high and low level signals. MOSFETs are connected as cascode or ‘H’
bridge class ‘D’ amplifiers, which switch the
6.6.1.3.2 FET Driver PA volts at the RF drive frequency (refer to
FET driver U1 is an integrated circuit Figure 6-6 for a description of class D
configured to produce outputs as follows: operation using power MOSFETs). RF drive
splitter transformer T1 splits the RF drive
x When the PDM signal applied to the HIN signal and applies it to MOSFETs Q1
input is high (15 V), the HO output is the dc through Q4 with the required phase
voltage applied to the VB input. relationship. Diodes CR1 through CR4
prevent the output of the RF amplifier from
x When the PDM signal applied to the HIN going negative. Transistor Q5 and
input is low (0 V), the HO output is the associated components detect the RF drive
reference voltage applied to the VS input. level and provide an alarm signal to the
control/display PWB. Resistors R5 through
The HO output, which contains the PDM data, R7 provide a PA Volts Sample for front
is applied to the gate of power MOSFET Q1 panel monitoring.
as its on/off control.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-21 (6-22 Blank)
Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
 FROM DC DISTRIBUTION BATTERY BOOST B+
(OPTIONAL)

INT SERIAL LINK,

CONTROL/MONITOR
FROM EXCITER/
CONTROL/MONITOR BLOCK 24VDC(A), RF DRIVE(A), PDM(A)

B+ SAMPLE (A)
24VDC(B), RF DRIVE(B), PDM(B) RF POWER
SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR MODULE
A RF POWER MODULE
24VDC(A), RF DRIVE(A), PDM(A) OUTPUT A
A

RF POWER RF FILTER RF OUTPUT TO RF POWER PROBE

BLOCK
DISTRIBUTION B

RF POWER MODULE
OUTPUT B
RF POWER
B+ SAMPLE (B) MODULE
B
SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR

24VDC(B), RF DRIVE(B), PDM(B)

RELAY CONTROL

SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR TO RF POWER

BLOCKS (OPTIONAL)

FROM AC DISTRIBUTION AC POWER

B1950016 VD

Dimensions = mm (inches)

Block Diagram – RF Power Block

Issue 2.0 Not to Scale Figure 6-4 Page 6-23 (6-24 Blank)
 FROM DC DISTRIBUTION BATTERY BOOST B+
(OPTIONAL)

MODULATOR
FROM RF POWER BLOCK AC POWER B+ VDC FILTER
SWITCH RF POWER MODULE TO IMPEDANCE
MODE OUTPUT MATCHING TRANSFORMER
POWER
INT SERIAL LINK, CONTROL/MONITOR SUPPLY
MODULATOR
CONTROL/MONITOR
FROM RF POWER BLOCK +VDC
DISTRIBUTION PWB RF POWER
AMPLIFIER
24VDC, RF DRIVE, PDM CONTROL/MONITOR

+VDC
POWER Fpdm/PDM
MODULE
INTERFACE
+VDC

RF DRIVE

MONITOR

B+ SAMPLE TO RF POWER BLOCK

DISTRIBUTION PWB

24VDC FANS

B1950015 VE
TACH

Dimensions = mm (inches)

Block Diagram – RF Power Module

Issue 2.0 Not to Scale Figure 6-5 Page 6-25 (6-26 Blank)
 6.6.2 Power Block Distribution PWB 6.7.2 Forward/Reflected Power
See Figure SD-27. The power block Probe
distribution PWB (A4 of each RF power The forward/reflected power probe circuit,
block) provides the following functions: located on RF power probe PWB A1A1,
consists of 20:1 RF current transformer T1,
x Interfaces critical signals and serial bus 80:4 RF voltage transformer T3 and
information between the RF power block associated components. These transformers
and the exciter/control/ monitor stage. form the current and voltage arms of a
forward/reflected power bridge, which
x If RF power module A (or B) is removed,
samples the RF output.
provides an Inhibit PDM signal (using
FETs Q1 and Q2) to all remaining side A
The current flowing into the RF output passes
(or side B) RF power modules.
through transformer T1’s primary. The current
x Controls the status of the RF power in T1’s secondary develops a voltage across
block’s selector relay K1, which resistors R3 through R7 that is proportional to
determines which RF power module (side the RF output current. The anti-phase voltage
A or B) is contributing to the RF output. across the secondary of RF voltage
transformer T3 is applied (summed) to the
6.6.3 RF Filter PWB centre-tap of T1’s secondary. When the RF
See Figure SD-23. The RF filter PWB (A5 of output impedance is precisely 50 :, the RF
each RF power block) is a band pass filter current waveform is in-phase and of equal
that attenuates the harmonics of the square amplitude to the RF voltage waveform on one
wave output applied from the selected RF half of T1’s center-tapped secondary and
power module before it is applied to the RF equal amplitude, but 180q out-of-phase on the
combiner/probe. The filter has a flat response other half.
characteristic over the operating bandwidth. It
has a nominal input and output impedance of The in-phase voltages are summed, rectified
50 : and a loaded Q of 2. The band-pass is by CR4, low-pass filtered by L3/C2/L4,
selected using frequency dependent link resulting in a dc voltage being applied to the
connections (E1 through E36). Fwd Pwr Sample output (J1-1). This voltage
is proportional to the RF output's forward
6.7 RF COMBINER/PROBE power level.
See Figure SD-2. The RF combiner/ probe
(A1) combines the RF power block outputs The out-of-phase voltages are summed,
into the transmitter’s final RF output. Various rectified by CR1, low-pass filtered by
probe circuits monitor the RF output and L1/C1/L2, resulting in a dc voltage being
provide RF voltage, RF current, forward applied to the Refld Pwr Sample output
power and reflected power monitoring (J1-5). This voltage is proportional to the RF
samples to the exciter control/monitor stage. output's reflected power level.

6.7.1 RF Combiner Transformer T3’s secondary voltage, which is a true

Transformer T1 is connected as an sample of the RF output’s voltage waveform,
impedance matching/isolation device. is also applied to the RF Volts Monitor output
Depending on the transmitter’s maximum (J1-9). This output is intended for monitoring
power level, T1 accepts up to four RF inputs by a modulation monitor and for test
and provides an RF output, equal to their equipment during maintenance.
sum, into a 50 : load. Each input is isolated
from the other inputs and provides the 50 :
impedance required by the power amplifier.
T1 is not used in the VR500 transmitter,
when there is only one RF power block.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-27

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
6.7.3 RF Current Probe When calibrating the modulation limits for the
The RF current probe circuit, located on RF monitor (see 3.6.7), the system automatically
power probe PWB A1A1, consists of 40:1 RF tests using both current and voltage samples
current transformer T2 and associated and selects the sample that places most
components. The current flowing into the RF stress on the transmitter (i.e., the highest
output passes through the primary of modulation depth).
transformer T2. The current in T2’s
secondary winding develops a voltage across The following explanation should assist in
resistors R9 and R10 that is proportional to understanding this phenomenon.
the primary (RF output) current. This voltage
is applied to the RF Current Sample output A typical radiobeacon antenna is relatively
(J1-17), which is used by the control/display inefficient, since it is very short when
PWB's high RF current detector and compared with the wavelength of the carrier
metering circuit. This high RF current frequency. The high capacitive reactance of a
detector produces a high RF current alarm typical antenna is tuned to the carrier
and causes the transmitter's RF output to frequency, by an antenna tuning unit's (ATU)
shut back (turn off) when the RF current loading coils, to produce a series resonant
exceeds a threshold that represents the circuit. The resulting net antenna system
maximum stress current for the RF power resistance is then transformed to 50 : by a
modules. The current sample voltage is also matching transformer. When the antenna is
applied to the RF Current Monitor output very short compared with the wavelength of
(J1-13), which is used for external the carrier frequency, the series resonant
monitoring purposes. circuit has an extremely high 'Q'. Under these
conditions, the antenna system may present
6.8 MODULATION DEPTH WHEN a 50 : load to the transmitter at the carrier
USING A HIGH ‘Q’ ANTENNA frequency but different impedance at the
When the transmitter's output is connected to sideband frequencies.
a high 'Q' antenna system, the modulation
envelope observed on the RF current The mismatch at the sideband frequencies
waveform may differ from that on the RF will cause a standing wave on the feed cable.
voltage waveform. This difference is caused Depending upon the length of the feed cable,
by antenna impedance mismatch at the the sideband impedance of the antenna
sideband frequencies, which results in system will appear to be more or less than
reflected power standing waves on the feed 50 :. When the transmitter is connected to a
cable. Depending upon feed cable length, the high 'Q' antenna system, the difference
sideband impedance may be more or less between the carrier impedance and the
than 50 :. When the sideband impedance is sideband impedance may cause RF stress
less than 50 :, the sideband current will current limits to be exceeded. When this
increase and may place undesirable stress occurs, remedial action must be taken
on the solid state devices in modulator/power instantly.
amplifier.

Page 6-28 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 6 Theory of Operation
 SIMPLE CLASS 'D' OPERATION

If the switch is opened and closed with a 50%

duty cycle, a square wave at the switching
frequency will result at the filter input. If the
filter is designed to pass the switching
frequency, but attenuate its harmonics, a sine
wave is applied to the load.
POWER MOSFET CLASS 'D' OPERATION

Power MOSFETs can be used to replace the

switches as depicted in the simple class 'D'
operation and push-pull class 'D' operation
examples. Note that the switch contacts are
replaced by the phase-oriented secondaries
of an RF drive transformer. Q1 corresponds
to S1-A, Q2 to S1-B, Q3 to S2-B and Q4 to
PUSH-PULL CLASS 'D' OPERATION S2-A, as depicted in the push-pull class 'D'
operation example. Q1 and Q4 turn on/off
If S1 and S2 are opened and closed with a together and Q2 and Q3 turn on/off together.
50% duty cycle, a square wave of current, at
the switching frequency, is passed through
the primary of the transformer and
transformed to its secondary. If the filter is
designed to pass the switching frequency, but
attenuate its harmonics, a sine wave is
applied to the load.

Figure 6-6 Simplified Principles of Class 'D' Operation

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 6-29

Section 6 Theory of Operation Issue 2.0
Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Section 7 PARTS INFORMATION

7.1 INTRODUCTION x Follow the family tree branches to the
This section contains parts lists that provide block that represents the lowest level
descriptive and provisioning information for all assembly assigned a Nautel
electrical and mechanical parts that have configuration control number. Then locate
been assigned a reference designation and the reference designation table for that
form a part of the subject equipment. Nautel configuration control number.

7.2 FAMILY TREE x Locate the part's reference designation in

Figures 7-1 and 7-2 depict the family tree for the specified table.
the subject equipment. It is based on the
descending order of the reference 7.4 REFERENCE DESIGNATION
designation hierarchy and identifies all LISTS
assemblies that have an assigned Nautel Individual reference designation lists are
configuration control number. provided for:

7.3 HOW TO LOCATE INFORMATION x Assemblies assigned an alpha-prefixed

FOR A SPECIFIC PART Nautel nomenclature (e.g., NAE89A)
To locate the information for a specific part,
the assigned reference designation for the x Cable harnesses that are assigned a
part must be known. In addition, the Nautel numbered Nautel part (e.g., 195-9002)
configuration control number (e.g., NAE89A)
assigned to the assembly containing the part x Optional kits that are assigned a
or the full reference designation, including the numbered Nautel part (e.g., 195-9054)
reference designation of all higher
assemblies, must be known. The reference designation lists, which are
titled and presented in alphanumeric order,
7.3.1 When Nautel Configuration are divided into columns to aid in locating
Control Number Is Known specific information.
When the Nautel configuration control
number (e.g., NAE89A) is known, the 7.5 COLUMN CONTENT
information for a specific part can be located EXPLANATION
in the alphanumerically sorted reference The following paragraphs explain the purpose
designation lists. and contents of each column in the reference
designation lists.
7.3.2 When Ref Des Is Known
When the full reference designation is 7.5.1 Ref Des Column
known, the information for a part can be The ‘ref des’ column contains the reference
located as follows: designation for a specific part. These
designations are assigned in accordance with
x Refer to the family tree depicted in Figure the requirements of American National
7-1 or 7-2 with the full reference Standard Specification ANSI Y32.16.
designation. Reference designations are listed
alphanumerically in this column.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 7-1

Section 7 Parts Information Issue 2.0
7.5.2 Description Column NOTE
This column contains the name and OEM code 37338 is listed for parts
descriptive information for each part. The key manufactured by Nautel or to a Nautel control
word or noun is presented first, followed by drawing. United States of America customers
the adjective identifiers. When the description should refer all replacement part orders to
is 'See Family Tree for Assembly Nautel Maine Incorporated (OEM code
Nomenclature', the associated part is subject 57655).
to its own reference designation list or is
contained in an optional kit’s list. If a family 7.6 OEM CODE TO
tree is not provided in this section, assume MANUFACTURER CROSS-
the latter to be true. REFERENCE
The OEM (CAGE) codes listed in the
7.5.3 Nautel # Column reference designation lists are
This column contains the Nautel part number representative of the original equipment
assigned to each part. This number is manufacturers of those parts. To determine
Nautel's drawing number for Nautel a specific part’s manufacturer contact
manufactured parts, Nautel's configuration information, enter the five-character OEM
control number for assemblies that are under (CAGE) code for that part in the following
configuration control management or Nautel's website:
inventory management number for purchased
parts. When a Nautel configuration control https://www.bpn.gov/bincs/begin_search.asp
number (e.g. NAPC*) is referenced in this
column, the associated ref des item is subject Upon entering the OEM (CAGE) code
to its own reference designation table. number, manufacturer pertinent information
(address, telephone number, fax number,
7.5.4 Vendor # Column: etc.) shall be displayed. Please contact
This column contains an original equipment Nautel if a part cannot be obtained (see also
manufacturer's part number for a part. A ON-LINE PART QUOTES in this manual’s
single part number is listed for each part, Warranty section).
even if there is more than one known
manufacturer. The listed number is Nautel's 7.6.1 Manufacturer’s Index
usual or preferred choice. The use of this For users without internet access, Table 7-1
number does not restrict Nautel from provides a cross-reference from the original
selecting and using commercial equivalents, equipment manufacturer’s (OEM) codes to
where their use will not degrade circuit the manufacturer’s name. The listing is sorted
operation or reliability, during manufacture. alphanumerically by the OEM code.

7.5.5 OEM Code Column

This column typically contains a five digit
coded group as the original equipment
manufacturer's (OEM) identifier. The code
was extracted from Cataloging Handbook
H4/H8 - Commercial and Government Entity
(Cage) Code. Manufacturers that were not
listed in the catalog when this listing was
compiled have been assigned a unique five-
letter code. This code is assigned arbitrarily
and has no other significance. The
manufacturers identified for parts that have
JAN or MIL part numbers are Nautel's
normal supply source for that part.

Page 7-2 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 8 Parts Information
 7.7 COMMON ABBREVIATIONS/ MTA - Denotes item is a Mass Termination
ACRONYMS Assembly connector.
The following abbreviations/acronyms may
appear in Description column: SIP - Single In-line Package

DIP - Dual In-line Package SMT - Denotes item is designed to be

installed using Surface Mount
IDC - Denotes item is an Insulation Technology.
Displacement connector for ribbon
cable.

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 7-3

Section 7 Parts Information Issue 2.0
Table 7-1: Manufacturer’s Index

00779 CTS Company Incorporated 57655 Nautel Maine Incorporated

01295 Texas Instruments Incorporated 59124 KOA Speer Electronics Incorporated
021P3 Ametherm Inc. 5Y407 Phoenix Contact Incorporated
02660 Amphenol Corp Spectra-Strip/Ltd. 61529 Airmat Corporation
04713 Motorola Incorporated 61935 Schurter Inc
06090 Raychem Corporation 63590 Premier Industrial Corp SPC Technology
07263 Fairchild Camera and Instrument Corp Div
08779 Signal Transformer Company Inc 64155 Linear Technology Corporation
09482 Amp of Canada Limited 65786 Cypress Semiconductor Corp.
0A5K5 IXYS Corporation 68994 XILINX Incorporated
0B0A9 Dallas Semiconductor Corporation 69669 Hammond Power Solutions Inc
0CYY5 Emission Control Ltd. 71400 Cooper Bussmann Inc.
0G343 Huffman Mfg. Co. 71468 ITT Industries Inc.
0GP12 Radiall Incorporated 73831 Hammond Manufacturing Co. Ltd.
12969 Micro USPD Incorporated 74199 Quam Nichols Co.
13150 Axsys Technologies Incorporated 75042 TRW Incorporated
14655 Cornell Dubilier Electronics 75915 Littelfuse Tracor Incorporated
16704 Cramer Coil and Transformer Co. Inc. 7D893 Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation
19647 Caddock Electronics Incorporated 80294 Bourns Instruments Incorporated
1EM90 Lumex Opto/Components Incorporated 81073 Grayhill Incorporated
1FN41 Atmel Corporation 81483 International Rectifier
1JRT7 Epson Electronics American, Inc 83330 Dialight Corporation, DBA Dialight
1K126 C & D Technologies 90201 Mallory Sonalert Products Inc.
1MQ07 ZRG Incorporated 91833 Keystone Electronics Corporation
1UX99 Molex Connector Corporation 91929 Honeywell Incorporated
1W344 United Chemi-Con 96095 AVX Ceramics Div of AVX Corp.
21574 Ferraz Shawnut Co. AGILENT See 50434
22421 Thomas and Betts Limited ATC-FROS
23875 M-Tron Industries Incorporated CANTH Cantherm
24355 Analog Devices Inc. C3057 Conec Elektronische Bauelemente
25706 Daburn Electronics & Cable Corporation GMBH
26806 American Zettler Inc. COILC Coilcraft
27014 National Semiconductor Corp DEARBO Dearborn Electronics Incorporated
28198 Positronic Industries Inc. EPCOS Epcos
31433 Kemet Electronics Corporation ER737 Texas Instruments
31781 Edac Incorporated IXYS See 0A5K5
33062 Ferronics Incorporated LEM
35005 Dale Electronics Limited LITEON
37338 Nautel Limited MAGCRFT
3AC42 Absopulse Electronics Ltd. MAGNE MagneTek Triad
3DX59 Citizen America Corporation MICREL Micrel Incorporated
3GZQ8 Delta Products Corporation MURATA Murata
3N087 Mill-Max Manufacturing Corporation ONSEMI ON Semiconductors
45496 Digital Systems PANAS
4G927 RayChem Corporation QT QT Optoelectronics
50434 Agilent Technologies Incorporated SBE SB Electronics Incorporated
54583 TDK Electronics Corporation SOSH Soshin Electric Company, Limited
56289 Sprague Electric Company TAIKO TAIKO Electronic
56699 BC Components U3040 ST Microelectronics Ltd.
56845 Vishay Dale Electronics Incorporated

Page 7-4 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual

Issue 2.0 Section 8 Parts Information
 VECTOR NDB TRANSMITTER
NARB17A

A1 A3 A2
RF COMBINER/PROBE RF POWER BLOCK EXCITER/CONTROL ASSY
NAH54/01A, /02A or /03A NAX234B NAE89A

(SEE NAX234B FAMILY TREE)

A1A1 A2A1 A2A2

RF POWER PROBE PWB CONTROL/DISPLAY PWB EXCITER INTERFACE PWB
NAPF07C/01 NAPC147C NAPI76A/01

A2A3 A2A4
REMOTE INTERFACE PWB NDB SITE INTERFACE PWB
NAPI78D/01 NAPI80
A7 A8
DC POWER DISTRIBUTION AC POWER DISTRIBUTION (OPTIONAL)
NAX233/01A (VR500)
NAX235/01A (VR500)
NAX233/02A (VR1000)
NAX235/02 (VR1000)
NAX233/04A (VR2000)
A2A5 A2A6
RF SYNTHESIZER PWB (A) INTERPHASE PDM DRIVER PWB (A)
NAPE70C NAPM11

A7A1
DC CONTROL/MONITOR PWB
NAPC149B
A2A7 A2A8
LVPS BUCK CONVERTER PWB (A) EXCITER MONITOR/GENERATOR PWB (A)
NAPS32A/01A NAPE76A/02

A7A2
BATTERY BOOST PWB
NAPS34
A2A9 A2A10
(USED ON NAX235/01 ONLY) RF SYNTHESIZER PWB (B) INTERPHASE PDM DRIVER PWB (B)
NAPE70C NAPM11

A7A3
BATTERY BOOST PWB
NAPS34
A2A11 A2A12
(USED ON NAX235/02 ONLY) LVPS BUCK CONVERTER PWB (B) EXCITER MONITOR/GENERATOR PWB (B)
NAPS32A/01A NAPE76A/02

A2A13
DC/DC POWER SUPPLY PWB
NAPS33
F1950506 V2

Figure 7-1: Family Tree – Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter

Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical Instruction Manual Page 7-5

Section 7 Parts Information Issue 2.0
 A3
RF POWER BLOCK
NAX234B

A1 A2 A4
RF POWER MODULE (A) RF POWER MODULE (B) POWER BLOCK DISTRIBUTION PWB
NAP33B NAP33B NAPI81
(SAME AS A1)

A1A1 A1A2 A5 A6
CONTROL/INTERFACE PWB SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY PWB RF FILTER PWB RF TRANSFORMER PWB
NAPC148 NAPS31B/01 NAPF05A NAPX32/01

A1A3 A1A4
POWER AMPLIFIER MODULATOR FILTER PWB
NAAA06 NAPF06

A1A5
MODULATOR ASSY
NASM11A/01

F1950507 V1

Figure 7-2: Family Tree – RF Power Block

Page 7-6 Vector Radio Beacon Transmitter Technical InstructionManual

Issue 2.0 Section 8 Parts Information
195-1001 Cableform Assy
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
P01 Conn,Rcpt Housing,12 Pin,Metrimate JP65 211759-1 09482
P02 Conn, Plug, 3-Pin, Mate-N-Lok JT50 350766-1 00779
P03 Conn, Plug, 3-Pin, Mate-N-Lok JT50 350766-1 00779
P04 Conn, Plug, 3-Pin, Mate-N-Lok JT50 350766-1 00779

195-1015 Ribbon Cable Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
W1P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 10 pin JP50 746285-1 00779
W1P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 10 pin JP50 746285-1 00779
W2P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 10 pin JP50 746285-1 00779
W2P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 10 pin JP50 746285-1 00779
W3P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779
W3P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779

Page 1 of 95 195-1015
195-3001-01 Cableform Assy
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
P01 MTA, Standard Dust Cover, 8 pin JU07 640551-8 09482
P01 MTA, Keyed Closed End Housing,8 pin,22AWG JU28 644463-8 00779
P02 MTA, Standard Dust Cover, 4 pin JU02 640551-4 09482
P02 MTA, Keyed Closed End Housing,4 pin,22AWG JU27 3-644463-4(ROHS) 00779
AMP
P03 MTA, Standard Dust Cover, 4 pin JU02 640551-4 09482
P03 MTA, Keyed Closed End Housing,4 pin,22AWG JU27 3-644463-4(ROHS) 00779
AMP
P10 MTA, Standard Dust Cover, 4 pin JU02 640551-4 09482
P10 MTA, Keyed Closed End Housing,4 pin,22AWG JU27 3-644463-4(ROHS) 00779
AMP
W08 Cable,SATA,.5m,Straight to Straight UA90 88758-0210 13150
W09 Cable,SATA,.5m,Straight to Straight UA90 88758-0210 13150
W11P1 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W11P1 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, P, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT31 745496-3 09482
W11P2 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W11P2 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, P, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT31 745496-3 09482
W12P1 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W12P1 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, S, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT30 745495-3 09482
W12P2 Conn, Plug, Size 11-4 JQ02 206429-1 09482
W12P2 Conn, Clamp, Strain Relief, Size 11, Std JQ03 206062-1 09482
W12P3 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W12P3 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, P, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT31 745496-3 09482
W13 Line Cord, 10A/250Vac, M & F,8Ft, 18 AWG JM48 ECM-13032-BLACK- ELECTRO
8FT ELCTRO CORD
MAN.
W13P1 Plug, Rewireable,250Vac, 16A JDP46 4796.0000(RoHS) SCHURTE
W15P01 Conn, Plug, Size 11-4 JQ02 206429-1 09482
W15P01 Conn, Clamp, Strain Relief, Size 11, Std JQ03 206062-1 09482
W15P02 Conn, Plug, Size 11-4 JQ02 206429-1 09482
W15P02 Conn, Clamp, Strain Relief, Size 11, Std JQ03 206062-1 09482

Page 2 of 95 195-3001-01
195-3014 Ribbon Cable Assy
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
W01P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W01P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W02P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W02P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W03P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W03P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W04P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W04P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W05P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W05P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W06P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779
W06P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779
W06P3 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W07P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779
W07P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779
W10P1 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779
W10P2 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 40 pin JP51 746288-9 00779

195-3019 Display Mod

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
J01 Conn, Header, Ribbon Cbl, 20Pin JQ55 103308-5 00779
U01 Display,LCD,240x60 Graphic,Ext Temp UT81 C10815(STATIC) 36AB3
PACIFIC DISPLAY
DEVICES

195-3023 Ribbon Cable Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
W16P01 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779
W16P02 Conn, Recept, Ribbon Cable, 20 pin JP45 746288-4 00779

Page 3 of 95 195-3023
195-5001-01 Power Block Cableform Assy
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
P01 Conn, Plug, Size 11-4 JQ02 206429-1 09482
P01 Conn, Clamp, Strain Relief, Size 11, Std JQ03 206062-1 09482
P07 Line Cord, 220V, 18/3AWG, 5VT JM46 18/3 AWG, 5VT 0B445
P08 Line Cord, 220V, 18/3AWG, 5VT JM46 18/3 AWG, 5VT 0B445
W1P01 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W1P01 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, S, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT30 745495-3 09482
W1P02 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W1P02 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, P, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT31 745496-3 09482
W1P03 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W1P03 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, S, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT30 745495-3 09482
W1P04 Conn, Shell, D-Sub, 25 pin, T-Screw JK16 DBBS-25 71468
W1P04 Conn, IDC, D-Sub, P, HDE-20, 25-Pos JT31 745496-3 09482
W2P01 Conn, Coax, N, Plug, 50ohm, Crimp, RG58 JDP22 82-5375 02660
W2P02 Conn, Coax, N, Plug, 50ohm, Crimp, RG58 JDP22 82-5375 02660
XA1P1 Conn,Sckt Housing,12 Socket,Metrimate JP66 211758-1 09482
XA2P1 Conn,Sckt Housing,12 Socket,Metrimate JP66 211758-1 09482

195-7155 Cableform Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
P03 Conn, Plug, 3-Pin, Mate-N-Lok JT50 350766-1 00779
P04 Conn, Plug, 3-Pin, Mate-N-Lok JT50 350766-1 00779

195-7158 Cableform Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
P01 Conn, Plug, 3-Pin, Mate-N-Lok JT50 350766-1 00779
P02 Conn, Plug, 3-Pin, Mate-N-Lok JT50 350766-1 00779

Page 4 of 95 195-7158
NAAA06 Power Amplifier Assy
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
C01 Capacitor, Ceramic, 1.0uF 100V CAP16 RPE114Z5U105M100V 91929

C02 Capacitor,Polyprop,0.056uF,10%,600V CP30 716P56396L SBE

C03 Capacitor, Ceramic, 0.47uF 10% 50V CCG09 CKR06BX474KRV 56289
C04 Capacitor, Ceramic, 0.01uF 10% 100V CCG04 CKR05BX103KRV 56289
C05 Capacitor, Ceramic, 1.0uF 100V CAP16 RPE114Z5U105M100V 91929

C06 Capacitor, Ceramic, 1.0uF 100V CAP16 RPE114Z5U105M100V 91929

C07 Capacitor, Ceramic, 0.1uF 10%100V CCG07 CKR06BX104KRV 56289

CR01 Diode, Power Rectifier, 4A, Ultra Fast QM22 MUR460 04713
CR02 Diode, Power Rectifier, 4A, Ultra Fast QM22 MUR460 04713
CR03 Diode, Power Rectifier, 4A, Ultra Fast QM22 MUR460 04713
CR04 Diode, Power Rectifier, 4A, Ultra Fast QM22 MUR460 04713
CR05 Diode, General Purpose, 200V,0.1A QAP29 1N4938 07263
E01 Connector, Quick-Dis, M,1/4 Tab, PWB HR26 1287 91833
E02 Connector, Quick-Dis, M,1/4 Tab, PWB HR26 1287 91833
E03 Connector, Quick-Dis, M,1/4 Tab, PWB HR26 1287 91833
F01 Fuse, 1A, 250V, Slow, 3AG FA08 313001 75915
J01 Conn, Header, Ribbon Cbl, 10 pin JA49 499910-1 00779
Q01 Installed at Next Higher Assy + INSTALLED AT NEXT 37338
HIGHER ASSY
Q02 Installed at Next Higher Assy + INSTALLED AT NEXT 37338
HIGHER ASSY
Q03 Installed at Next Higher Assy + INSTALLED AT NEXT 37338
HIGHER ASSY
Q04 Installed at Next Higher Assy + INSTALLED AT NEXT 37338
HIGHER ASSY
Q05 Transistor, NPN, Switch/Amplifier QA45 2N4401 04713
R01 Resistor, Film, 100 Ohms, 5%2W RBP07 GS-3, 100 OHMS 75042
R02 Installed at Next Higher Assy + INSTALLED AT NEXT 37338
HIGHER ASSY
R03 Resistor, MF, 15.0K Ohms, 1PC1/4W RAB39 MF1/4DL1502F 59124
R04 Resistor, MF, 8.25K Ohms, 1PC1/4W RAB36 MF1/4DL8251F 59124
R05 Resistor, Film, 33K Ohms, 5%,2W RBP22 GS-3, 33K OHMS 75042
R06 Resistor, MF, 1K Ohms, 1PC 1/4W RAB25 MF1/4DL1001F 59124
R07 Resistor, MF, 1K Ohms, 1PC 1/4W RAB25 MF1/4DL1001F 59124
T01 Installed at Next Higher Assy + INSTALLED AT NEXT 37338
HIGHER ASSY
U01 Installed at Next Higher Assy + INSTALLED AT NEXT 37338
HIGHER ASSY
XF01 Fuseholder, PWB Mount, Type 3AG FA31 4245 91833

Page 5 of 95 NAAA06
NAE89A Exciter Control Assy, VectorRLS 2
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
A01 Control Display PWB Assy NAPC147D 195-2050-04 37338
A02 Exciter Interface PWB AssyVector NAPI76A/01 195-3020-02 37338
A03 Remote Interface PWB (Vector) NAPI78D/01 195-2060-09 37338
A04 See Sales Order % % SEE SALES 37338
ORDER
A05 See Master Work Order * * SEE MASTER 37338
WORK ORDER
A06 Interphase PDM Driver PWB Assy NAPM11 197-3060 37338
A07 LVPS Buck Converter PWB Assy - Vector HP NAPS32A/01A 195-7025-06 37338
A08 Exciter Monitor/GeneratorPWB Assy, (>250W) NAPE76A/02 195-3030-05 37338
A09 See Master Work Order * * SEE MASTER 37338
WORK ORDER
A10 See Master Work Order * * SEE MASTER 37338
WORK ORDER
A11 See Master Work Order * * SEE MASTER 37338
WORK ORDER
A12 Exciter Monitor/GeneratorPWB Assy, (>250W) NAPE76A/02 195-3030-05 37338
A13 DC-DC Power Supply PWB Assy NAPS33 195-7030 37338
J01 Conn, Socket, 3 pin, Recessed, 250Vac, 6A JT22 EAC309 82389
J02 Conn, Socket, 3 pin, Recessed, 250Vac, 6A JT22 EAC309 82389
J03 Conn, Recept, Sq Flng, Size 11-4 JQ01 206430-1 09482
LS01 Speaker, 45 Ohm, 2W LP07 30A05Z45 74199
M01 Meter,0-4kW,0-30A,mod%,142ohm,1mA,FSD MD52B 195-9020 37338
P06 MTA, Standard Dust Cover, 4 pin JU02 640551-4 09482
P06 MTA, Keyed Closed End Housing,4 pin,22AWG JU27 3-644463-4(ROHS) 00779
AMP
T01 See Sales Order % % SEE SALES 37338
ORDER
TB01 Terminal Block, 4-pos, Single, FT, 15A JB11 381401104 13150
TB02 See Sales Order % % SEE SALES 37338
ORDER
U01 Display Mod 195-3019 195-3019 37338
U02 PS,AC DC IP Concurrently,24V,50W,EXTTemp UB53 MIW150- 3AC42
P4841(STATIC)
U03 See Master Work Order * * SEE MASTER 37338
WORK ORDER
U04 See Sales Order % % SEE SALES 37338
ORDER
U05 Rect/Assy, Bridge, 800V, 35A UF28 GBPC3508 LITEON

Page 6 of 95 NAE89A
NAH54/01A Combiner/Probe Assy (2 Input)
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
A01 RF Power Probe (VECTOR) PWBAssy NAPF07C/01 195-6020-08 37338
J01 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J02 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J05 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660

NAH54/02A Combiner/Probe Assy (3 Input)

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
A01 RF Power Probe (VECTOR) PWBAssy NAPF07C/01 195-6020-08 37338
J01 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J02 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J03 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J05 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660

NAH54/03A Combiner/Probe Assy (4 Input)

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
A01 RF Power Probe (VECTOR) PWBAssy NAPF07C/01 195-6020-08 37338
J01 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J02 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J03 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J04 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J05 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660

NAH54A Combiner/Probe Assy (1 Input)

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
A01 RF Power Probe (VECTOR) PWBAssy NAPF07A/01 195-6020-02 37338
J01 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660
J05 Conn, Coax, N, Recept, Panel,50ohm JDP21 UG58A/U 02660

Page 7 of 95 NAH54A
NAP33B RF Power Module Assy, Vector RLS 2
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
A01 Control Interface PWB Assy NAPC148 195-4020 37338
A02 SPS, Fwd Conv,(Vector)PWBAssy NAPS31B/01 197-7022-09 37338
A03 Power Amplifier Assy NAAA06 195-1055 37338
A04 Modulator Filter PWB Assy NAPF06 195-1090 37338
A05 Modulator (Vector) Assy NASM11A/01 195-1077-02 37338
A3Q01 Transistor, FET, N Channel QAP49 STW14NM50(STATIC) OG343
A3Q02 Transistor, FET, N Channel QAP49 STW14NM50(STATIC) OG343
A3Q03 Transistor, FET, N Channel QAP49 STW14NM50(STATIC) OG343
A3Q04 Transistor, FET, N Channel QAP49 STW14NM50(STATIC) OG343
A3R02 Resistor, 2.5 Ohm/15W, TO-126 RAB51 MP915-2.5-1 19647
A3T01 RF Drive Transformer Assy 197-1020 197-1020 37338
A3U01 IC, Mosfet Driver, T0220-5-12A UD54 MIC4452CT(STATIC) MICRELL
A5CR08 Diode, Ultrafast, Soft Recovery, 600V, 8A QR24 HFA08TB60(STATIC) 81483
A5L01 Bead, Ferrite, 3.5mm, B Mtl LXP20 21-030-B 33062
A5Q01 Transistor, FET, N Channel QAP49 STW14NM50(STATIC) OG343
B01 Fan, Brushless, DC, 24V, 40CFM ZA47 FFB0824SHE-F00 3GZQ8
B02 Fan, Brushless, DC, 24V, 40CFM ZA47 FFB0824SHE-F00 3GZQ8
P05 MTA, Standard Dust Cover, 4 pin JU02 640551-4 09482
P05 MTA, Keyed Closed End Housing,4 pin,22AWG JU27 3-644463-4(ROHS) 00779
AMP

Page 8 of 95 NAP33B
NAPC147D Control Display PWB Assy
REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
BT01 Battery, Lithium, 3V,20mm Coin Cell BBLT01 CR2032 PANAS
C001 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C002 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C003 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C004 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C005 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C006 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C007 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C008 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C009 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C010 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C011 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C012 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.001uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS01 C0603C102K5RAC 31433
C013 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C014 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C015 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C016 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C017 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C018 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.001uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS01 C0603C102K5RAC 31433
C019 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C020 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C021 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C022 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C023 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C024 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.001uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS01 C0603C102K5RAC 31433
C025 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C026 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C027 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C028 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C029 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C030 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C031 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C032 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.0022uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS02 C0603C222K5RAC 31433
C033 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.0047uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS03 C0603C472K5RAC 31433
C034 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C035 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C036 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C037 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C038 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433

Page 9 of 95 NAPC147D
 Continued from previous page

NAPC147D Control Display PWB Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
C039 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C040 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C041 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C042 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C043 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C044 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C045 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C046 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C047 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433
C048 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C049 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C050 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C051 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C052 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C053 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C054 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C055 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C056 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C057 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C058 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C059 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C060 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C061 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C062 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C063 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C064 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C065 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C066 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C067 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433
C068 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C069 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C070 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C071 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C072 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433
C073 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C074 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C075 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C076 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C077 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433

Page 10 of 95 NAPC147D
 Continued from previous page

NAPC147D Control Display PWB Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
C078 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C079 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C080 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C081 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C082 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C083 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C084 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C085 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C086 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C087 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C088 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C089 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C090 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C091 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C092 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C093 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C094 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C095 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C096 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C097 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C098 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C099 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C100 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C101 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C102 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C103 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C104 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C105 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C106 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C107 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C108 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C109 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C110 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C111 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C112 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C113 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C114 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C115 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C116 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433

Page 11 of 95 NAPC147D
 Continued from previous page

NAPC147D Control Display PWB Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
C117 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C118 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C119 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C120 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433
C121 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C122 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433
C123 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C124 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C125 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,18pF,2%,50V,C0G,0603 CCFS23 C0603C180G5GAC 31433
C126 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,18pF,2%,50V,C0G,0603 CCFS23 C0603C180G5GAC 31433
C127 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C128 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C129 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C130 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C131 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C132 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C133 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C134 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C135 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C136 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C137 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C138 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C139 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C140 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C141 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C142 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C143 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C144 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C145 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C146 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433
C147 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C148 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C149 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C150 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C151 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C152 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C153 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C154 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C155 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433

Page 12 of 95 NAPC147D
 Continued from previous page

NAPC147D Control Display PWB Assy

REFDES DESCRIPTION NAUTEL # VENDOR # OEM CODE
C156 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C157 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C158 Cap,SMT,Tantalum,10uF,10%,35V,2917 CTFS03 T494D106K035AS 31433
C159 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C160 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C161 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C162 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C163 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.01uF,10%,50V,X7R,0603 CCFS04 C0603C103K5RAC 31433
C164 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.47uF,10%,25V,X7R,0805 CCFS09 C0805C474K3RAC 31433
C165 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
C166 Cap,SMT,Ceramic,0.1uF,10%,50V,X7R,0805 CCFS07 C0805C104K5RAC 31433
CR01 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR02 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR03 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR04 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR05 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR06 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR07 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR08 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR09 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR10 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR11 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR12 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR13 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR14 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR15 Diode,SMT,Schottky,30V,0.2A,SOD-323 QDSS01 BAT54HT1(STATIC) 04713
CR16 Diode,SMT,Zener,39V,5%,3W,SMB QDZS04 1SMB5939BT3 04713
E01 Conn, Post Shunt, 2 Pos, .10 Centreline JQ15 390088-2 09482
E02 Conn, Post Shunt, 2 Pos, .10 Centreline JQ15 390088-2 09482
E03 Conn, Post Shunt, 2 Pos, .10 Centreline JQ15 390088-2 09482
J01 Conn, Header, Ribbon Cbl, 40 pin JP52 499910-9 00779
J02 Conn, Plug, D-Sub, 25 pin, PWB Mt JS12 K22-B25P-NJ 63590
J03 Conn, Header, SIP,12 Pin Breakaway,.10 Ctr JQ16 1-103185-2 09482
J04 Conn, Header, Ribbon Cbl, 40 pin JP52 499910-9 00779
J05 Conn, Header, SIP,12 Pin Breakaway,.10 Ctr JQ16 1-103185-2 09482
J06 Conn, Header, SIP,12 Pin Breakaway,.10 Ctr JQ16 1-103185-2 09482
J07 Conn, Header, Ribbon Cbl, 40 pin JP52 499910-9 00779
J08 Conn, Header,Square Post,Gold,Dual,40-pin JF47 4-102973-0 09482
J09 Conn, Header, Ribbon Cbl, 20Pin JQ55 103308-5 00779

Page 13 of 95 NAPC147D